LSY - Technical Part1 Ed03 PDF

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.
10
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
9600LSY/LHR REL.1.0/2.0 TECHNICAL HDBK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
QUICK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
1 DOCUMENT GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 Handbook Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5 Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01ADRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.3 Notes on Ed.01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.4 Notes on Ed.02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.5 Notes on Ed.03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 List Of Symbols And Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21
21
22
23
25
25
28
28
28
28
29
DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Introduction to the 9600LSY Radio System Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4 Main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.5 Network applications of the 9600LSY equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Introduction to system configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2 Station types and configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
39
40
40
40
41
42
45
47
47
47
03
020927
S402092301
G.CONSONNI ITAVE
E.CORRADINI ITAVE
G.MAISTO
E.CORRADINI ITACO
02
020418
S402040402
G.CONSONNI ITACO
01
011115
validated
G.CONSONNI ITACO
E.CORRADINI ITACO
F.BUTORI, G.MAISTO
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
9600LSY REL.1.0/2.0
LHR
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
1 / 514
50
51
51
51
52
54
58
61
62
62
63
63
63
68
76
77
82
82
82
90
93
97
97
97
98
99
100
109
109
109
109
109
114
114
114
115
117
117
118
3 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Rack and shelves summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Top Rack Unit (TRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 General equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 Channel provisioning/expansion guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 Base Band shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1 Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2 SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.3 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.4 RRACHANNEL unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.5 RRASTANDBY unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
121
122
126
128
129
129
131
134
135
140
144
147
149
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2.3.3 Channel configurations and protection schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4 Hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2 OPTINEX Rack and Top Rack Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3 Transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4 Baseband subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.5 ADM 1650SMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.6 FAN Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.7 System wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.8 Installation materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.2 Station configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.3 Radio channel configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.4 System configuration for network solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.5 Branching configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6 Radio Transmission features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.2 Frequency reuse technique (CCDP) and XPIC Cross Polarization Canceller . . . . . . . .
2.6.3 Transmitted power control: static and ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.4 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7 Signal Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.2 STM0 & STM1 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.3 SDH mapping adopted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.4 SDH interface usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.5 SOH bytes and service channel access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.3 Synchronization in Regenerator station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.4 Synchronization in WMSN station by means of 1650SMC ADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9 Equipment Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.3 The NE architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.4 The F interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.5 The Qecc/QB3 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.6 ECT and RECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
2 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

3.6.6 MODEM unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.7 PSU and PSF units operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.8 Additional Housekeeping unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.9 Kit Loudspeaker operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 Transceiver shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1 Transceiver shelf unit layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.2 Equipping rules of Transceiver units or substitutive Dummy Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.3 Composition of transceiver units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.4 TRANSCEIVER unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 Branching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.1 Branching drawings and BranchingTransceivers connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.2 Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9 FANS shelf and FANS assembled units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9.1 FANS shelf equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9.2 FANS assembled unit equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9.3 FANS assembled unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
153
154
155
156
156
156
157
158
168
168
168
169
169
169
171
4 SYSTEM CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Shelves connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1 T.R.U. connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2 Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3 Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connector layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.4 Transceiver shelf connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Cable kits and cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 Power supply distribution connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 Signal connections between shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6 ModemTransceiverBranching connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7 External interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.1 Power Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.2 SDH interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.3 Input / Output Unprotected WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.4 Input / Output Protected WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.5 Auxiliary Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.6 Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.7 Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.8 Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
175
175
176
176
178
180
181
183
190
191
193
202
202
202
202
202
203
207
208
208
5 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Equipment Control Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Control Subsystem Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2 Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.3 Control Subsystem Software Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.4 Signal Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.5 Remote Inventory subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.6 System Controller unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.7 Flash Card description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.8 Additional Housekeeping unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Power supply subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Baseband subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.1 Interconnection general block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.2 RRACHANNEL STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.3 RRASTANDBY STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
215
215
217
217
237
242
245
274
276
280
281
282
285
285
287
289
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
3 / 514

5.4.4 STM1 optical module description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.5 128QAM MODEM STM1 1WST and STM0 0WST description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.6 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 Transceiver subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1 Interconnection general block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2 DC/DC converter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.3 Transmit and Service module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.4 Receive & IF Rx module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.5 Local Oscillator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6 Fans subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
292
293
297
302
302
304
305
309
310
312
6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 System Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1 General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2 Power supply characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.3 Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Transceiver characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Regenerator and Modem characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.2 XPIC & Combiner (XPIC STM1 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.3 Regenerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.4 Power consumption (Regenerator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 Branching interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6 Protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7 Environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.1 General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.2 Mechanically active substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.3 ETS 300019 Class 3.2: partly Temperature controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.4 ETS 300019 Class 3.1: Temperaturecontrolled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.5 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.6 Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8 Optical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.1 Related Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.2 Hazard Level classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.3 Incorporated laser sources characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.4 Labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.5 Aperture and fiber connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.6 Engineering design features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.7 Safety instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
315
315
316
317
323
323
324
326
326
328
329
331
332
332
333
333
333
334
335
337
338
339
339
339
339
340
340
340
340
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
7 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1 EMC norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3 Maintenance Personnel skill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Instruments and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1 Software tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.2 System and Maintenance Tool Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Alarm Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 Centralized Equipment Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
355
355
356
356
356
357
357
357
358
361
361
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
4 / 514

7.4.2 Station Alarms (TRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.4.3 Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.4 Alarm visual indications on units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.5 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.1 Suggested Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.2 General rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.3 Spare Flash Card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6 Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.1 Routine Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.2 Routine Maintenance for Fans Assembled Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7 Corrective Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7.1 General flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7.2 Alarm acknowledgment and attending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7.3 TroubleShooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7.4 Unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8 Faulty unit repair and Repair Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.2 Repair Form filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
363
363
363
364
370
370
372
372
373
373
374
375
375
376
377
381
409
409
409
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

8 INTRODUCTION TO SECTION FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
413
9 9640LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 9640LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2 9640LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
415
415
416
10 9647LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1 9647LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2 9647LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
425
425
425
11 9662LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1 9662LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2 9662LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
429
429
429
12 9667LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1 9667LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
433
433
433
13 9674LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1 9674LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
435
435
436
14 9681LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1 9681LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
447
447
448
15 9610LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1 9610LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
453
453
453
16 9611LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1 9611LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.2 9611LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
455
455
455
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
5 / 514

17 9613LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.1 9613LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
459
459
459
APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
18 DOCUMENTATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2 Productreleaseversion handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.1 9600LSY specific equipment handbooks and CDROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.2 Related equipment handbooks and CDROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.3 General on Alcatel Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.3.1 CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.3.2 Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.3.3 Typical contents of Technical & Craft Terminal Operators Handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.3.4 Documentation on paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.3.5 Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.3.6 Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
465
465
466
466
471
472
472
473
475
477
479
481
19 SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.2 Compliance with European Norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3 Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3.1 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3.4 Harmful Optical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3.5 Risks of Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3.6 Moving Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3.7 Heatradiating Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3.8 Microwave radiations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3.9 Specific safety rules in this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.4.1 EMC General Norms Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.4.2 EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.4.3 EMC General Norms Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.5 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.6 Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.7 Labels affixed to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.7.1 Label specific for 9600LSY Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.7.2 General use labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
483
483
483
484
484
485
486
487
489
489
490
491
491
492
492
493
493
494
494
495
495
496
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
20 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.2 Hardware setting documents explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.3 List of enclosed documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.3.1 Documentation for hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.3.2 Other documents (Annexes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
507
507
507
510
510
513
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
6 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

FIGURES
Fig. 1. Backbone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
Fig. 2. Ring clousure and radio spurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
Fig. 3. Ring clousure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
Fig. 4. Regenerator and WMSN station rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
Fig. 5. Transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
Fig. 6. Single channel transceiver block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
Fig. 7. Baseband subrack equipped for 7+1/8+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
Fig. 8. Single channel regenerator block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
Fig. 9. Baseband functional protection scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
Fig. 10. Baseband board positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
Fig. 11. WMSN terminal rack equipped with 1650SMC ADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
Fig. 12. 1650SMC add drop multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
Fig. 13. MST single channel functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
Fig. 14. Fan Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
Fig. 15. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 regenerator configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
Fig. 16. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 WMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
Fig. 17. 9600LSY 7+1 Regenerator configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
Fig. 18. 9600LSY WMSNOS 7x STM1 configuration with radio protection for 7+1 STM1
transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
Fig. 19. 9600LSY WMSN Two Sides configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
Fig. 20. Channel arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
Fig. 21. 3+1 terminal basic station layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
Fig. 22. Terminal station layout: extension starting from A) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
Fig. 23. Terminal station layout: extension starting from B) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
Fig. 24. Terminal station layout: extension starting from C) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72
Fig. 25. Terminal station layout: extension starting from D) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
Fig. 26. Terminal station layout: extension starting from E) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
Fig. 27. 4+0/4+1 EAST/WEST terminal basic station layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
Fig. 28. Schematic diagram of transceiver to branching connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
Fig. 29. 1 polar per rack branching version for 8 RF channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
Fig. 30. Branching version for 8 RF channels, arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration . . . . . . . .
80
Fig. 31. Branching version for 3+1 configuration with Space Diversity, arranged in 2 polar per rack
version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
Fig. 32. XPIC operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
Fig. 33. Frequency reuse system architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
Fig. 34. 7+1 reused terminal with single protection (ch. 1H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
Fig. 35. 2 x (7+1) reused terminal with double protection (on ch. 1H and 1V) in 1PPR solution . .
86
Fig. 36. Expansion from 7+1 single protection to 2 x (7+1) reused terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
Fig. 37. Main / slave LO mutual protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
Fig. 38. Branching interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
Fig. 39. ATPC Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
Fig. 40. Loopback A: RRA line loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
Fig. 41. Loopback B: RRA internal loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
Fig. 42. Loopback C: RFCOH Internal loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
Fig. 43. EC position with respect to loopback points and consequent unavailability by RECT
(CHx/y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
Fig. 44. Allowed and not allowed loopbacks by RECT (CHx/y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96
Fig. 45. General Multiplexing Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
Fig. 46. General European Multiplexing Structure with addition of 45 Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
Fig. 47. 1650SMC and unit SERGI front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
7 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 48. G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 49. RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 50. RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 51. Synchronization Reference Source Priority Algorithm Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 52. SSM Algorithm Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 53. DCC management: Regenerator case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 54. DCC management: WMSN case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 55. Rack and shelves layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 56. Top Rack Unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 57. Layout of max 8 channels in single polarization configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 58. Layout of max 8 channels in double polarization configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 59. Single polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 60. Two polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with the H
channels on the left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 61. 2 polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with V channel on
the left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 62. Expansion procedure with reused channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 63. Unequipped Base Band shelf layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 64. Base Band shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering) . . . . .
Fig. 65. System Controller assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 66. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 67. System Controller front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 68. Service unit assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 69. Service unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 70. RRACHANNEL assembly view and front connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 71. RRACHANNEL unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 72. RRASTANDBY unit front view (particular) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 73. Modem unit assembly view and front connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 74. Modem unit assembly internal view and CANCCOMB equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 75. Modem unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 76. PSU and PSF units front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 77. Additional Housekeeping unit assembly view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 78. Kit Loudspeaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 79. Transceiver shelf equipment (slot numbering and board types and numbering) . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 80. Transceiver assembly physical views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 81. Transceiver internal view: standard components and Main Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 82. Transceiver internal view: without Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse
Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 83. Transceiver internal view: with Diversity Receiver and without TR.Frequency Reuse
Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 84. Transceiver internal view: with Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit .
Fig. 85. Position of Hardware setting dip switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 86. Transceiver internal connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 87. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR without Rx diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 88. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR with Rx diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 89. Transceiver front view meaning of access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 90. Branching Front Plate Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 91. Fan shelf (slot numbering and board types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 92. FANS SHELF, FANS ASSEMBLED and substitutive COVER assembly views . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 93. Front view of FANS SHELF equipped with both FANS ASSEMBLED units . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 94. Top Rack Unit connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 95. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 96. Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST front connector layout and numbering . . . . . .
Fig. 97. Transceiver shelf connector numbering at reartop side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
107
107
108
112
113
116
116
126
128
129
130
131
132
133
133
134
135
140
140
141
144
145
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
158
159
160
160
161
161
162
165
166
167
168
169
171
172
176
178
180
181
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
8 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 98. System cabling: types of used cables (A, B, C, D, E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 99. System cabling: types of used cables (F, G, H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 100. System cabling: types of used cables (K, N, P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 101. System cabling: types of used cables (KK, NN, PP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 102. System cabling: types of used cables (Q, R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 103. System cabling: types of used cables (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 104. System cabling: types of used cables (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 105. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and without Diversity . . . .
Fig. 106. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and with Diversity . . . . . . .
Fig. 107. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and without Diversity . . . . . . .
Fig. 108. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and with Diversity . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 109. LHR system (N+1 / N+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 110. WMSN system (N+1 / N+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 111. Functional decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 112. Supervision process decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 113. Supervision process within atomic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 114. RSPI functional decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 115. Regenerator section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 116. Radio sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 117. PM inside atomic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 118. Equipment management function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 119. Fault management inside management function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 120. Performance events generation process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 121. PM inside management functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 122. DCC routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 123. 1+1 Protection Switch Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 124. M:N Protection Switch Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 125. LHR control subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 126. LHR communication interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 127. WMSN control subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 128. VMM module decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 129. SOH management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 130. Service channels functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 131. DCCR management (ADM towards RADIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 132. DCCR management (RADIO towards ADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 133. DCCR management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 134. ATPC management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 135. MC management on RX terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 136. VC4 generation from 3 TUG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 137. Sub STM1 terminal functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 138. TIM algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 139. The 16_BYTE machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 140. The 1_BYTE machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 141. Remote inventory subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 142. System Controller block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 143. DCCR and summarizing/housekeeping alarms management block diagram . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 144. Additional Housekeeping block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 145. Power Supply distribution from Top Rack Unit and Transceiver shelf Power Supply
distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 146. Power Supply distribution in Baseband shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 147. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Tx side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 148. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Rx side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 149. RRACHANNEL block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 150. RRA STANDBY block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
184
185
186
187
188
189
189
195
197
199
201
215
215
217
218
219
220
222
222
223
227
228
229
230
232
233
234
238
239
241
244
248
250
252
253
254
256
257
259
262
270
271
271
275
277
279
281
282
283
285
286
288
291
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
9 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 151. STM1 optical module block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 152. MODEM block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 153. SERVICE block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 154. Switch logic N+1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 155. Input/output command signals of the Switch logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 156. Functional block diagram of Transceiver without Rx Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 157. Functional block diagram of Transceiver with Rx Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 158. Signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 159. Transmit and Service module block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 160. Block diagram of upconversion and amplification unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 161. Block diagram of Receive & IF Rx module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 162. Block diagram of Local Oscillator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 163. Fan subsystem block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 164. FANS ASSEMBLED unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 165. ETSI Reference points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 166. Climatogram for Class 3.2 : Partly temperature controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 167. Climatogram for Class 3.1: Temperaturecontrolled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 168. Climatogram for Class 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 169. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 170. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 171. STM1 128 QAM typical RF spectrum (measured at point C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 172. STM1/STM0 128 QAM IF RX Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 173. Post demodulation filter STM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 174. Post demodulation filter STM0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 175. STM1 /STM0 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for cochannel
interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 176. STM1 BER 1*103 and1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 40 MHz
digital interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 177. STM1 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 30 MHz
Fig. 178. STM0 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 14 MHz
Fig. 179. Typical signature for STM1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 180. Typical signature for STM1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 181. Typical signature for STM0 capacity @ BER=1x10e4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 182. Typical signature for STM0 capacity @ BER=1x10e6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 183. Special cord for PRx measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 184. Special extractors and holder bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 185. System Controller front view (particular) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 186. Station Alarms on TRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 187. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 188. TroubleShooting starting with visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 189. PSU to be switched off/on for MODEM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 190. General flow chart of Transceiver repair procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 191. Spare Local Oscillator subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 192. Spare Receiver subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 193. Spare Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 194. Spare Transceiver + Main Receiver subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 195. Spare Frequency Reuse kit 3connector flat cable subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 196. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 1/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
292
296
299
300
301
303
303
304
305
307
309
310
312
313
316
334
335
337
341
342
343
344
345
345
345
346
347
347
348
349
350
351
359
360
361
363
375
378
385
388
390
392
395
396
399
403
404
405
405
406
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
10 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10


Fig. 202. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 203. 9640 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 204. 9640 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.635 recommends 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 205. 9640 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR Recommendation F.382 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 206. 9640 LSY Channel plan D: ITUR F. 382 (Extended ) Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 207. 9640 LSY Channel plan E: DTI channel plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 208. 9640 LSY Channel plan F: ITUR Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6 . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 209. 9640 LSY Channel plan G: O.I.R.T. (Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 210. 9647 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2 . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 211. 9647 LSY Channel plan B: Spain Defence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 212. 9662 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F 383 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 213. 9662 LSY Channel plan B: O.I.R.T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 214. 9667 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.384, CEPT T/R 1402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 215. 9674 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 216. 9674 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.385 Annex 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 217. 9674 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR F.385 Annex 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 218. 9674 LSY Channel plan D: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 219. 9674 LSY Channel plan E: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 220. 9674 LSY Channel plan F: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 221. 9681 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 222. 9681 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 223. 9681 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 224. 9610 LSY Channel plan A: MEDIASET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 225. 9611 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.387 rec. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 226. 9611 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 227. 9613 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.497 Rec.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 228. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 229. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 230. Antistatic protection device kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 231. LSY equipment identification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 232. Largesubrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 233. Smallsubrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 234. Labels on units with standard cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 235. Modules label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 236. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 237. Back panels internal label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 238. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 239. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
406
410
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
426
427
430
431
434
437
438
440
441
443
445
449
450
451
454
456
457
460
473
474
494
495
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
503
TABLES
Tab. 1. Quick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 2. Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 3. List Of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 4. List Of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 5. 9600LSY radio family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 6. 9600LSY user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 7. LHR Terminal Regenerator System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 8. Couples of Radio Channels that can be used for protected service channels and WST . .
Tab. 9. OH bytes suitable for handling on MST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 10. OH bytes suitable for handling on RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 11. RFCOH byte structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 12. Reg. AUX/EOW user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 13. 9600LSY Part list Common parts (frequency independent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
25
29
29
44
44
50
50
100
101
101
103
122
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
11 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tab. 14. Rack and shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tab. 15. TRU breaker utilization in 9600 LSY/LHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 16. System Controller card equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 17. Additional Housekeeping unit equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 18. Service card equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 19. RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 20. Modem cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 21. PSU cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 22. Dummy plates for RRAModem and PSU equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 23. PSF cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 24. Kit Loudspeaker equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 25. ESC DipSwitch Bank I4 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 26. ESC DipSwitch Bank I1 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 27. Transceiver units and substitutive dummy plates equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 28. Branching Front Plate Kit equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 29. Fans unit & cover equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 30. Equipping rules for FANS assembled unit in Basebandshelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 31. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 32. Cable kits and cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 33. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 34. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 35. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT . .
Tab. 36. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL
FOR WMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 37. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 38. Signal connections: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT and FANS UNIT
EXTENSION CABLE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 39. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR
WMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 40. Signal connections: Cables belonging to ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 41. Summary of auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 42. Aux channel G703 and RS232 BB shelfs M182 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 43. Out party line OW, TPH and loudspeaker BB shelfs M190 connector pinout . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 44. Aux channel V11 BB shelfs M191 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 45. RJ45 Connector for 10baseT interface on System Controller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 46. RS232 for F interface connection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 47. LHR Station Alarms connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 48. Out Remote alarms (GA1GA20) BB shelfs M193 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 49. Out Remote alarms (GA21GA40) BB shelfs M183 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 50. Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms (GA41GA48) BB shelfs M192 connector
pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 51. Input Housekeeping BB shelfs M185 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 52. Input Housekeeping Additional Housekeeping units M1 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 53. Fault management process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 54. Entities monitored by the performance monitoring primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 55. Switching Initiation Criteria Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 56. DCC Mapping & Interleaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 57. Channels protectable for RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 58. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 59. LSY System Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 60. LSY Maintenance Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 61. Relationship between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm
severity terminology used for the System Controller unit remote alarm connector pins. . . . . . . . .
Tab. 62. Relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm primitives . . . . . . .
ED
127
128
136
136
136
137
138
138
139
139
139
143
143
156
168
169
170
179
183
190
190
190
190
191
191
192
192
203
204
205
206
207
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
221
225
235
255
297
339
358
359
361
364
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
12 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tab. 63. Relationship between Remote and Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tab. 64. Spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 65. Normal condition (no alarms) of LEDs on equipments units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 66. Transceiver internal cabling diagram according to configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 67. Implemented radiofrequency channel arrangements and list of Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 68. 9640LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 77. Handbooks usage according to System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 78. Technical Handbooks related to the specific configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 79. Handbooks related to the specific product SWP management and local product control .
Tab. 80. Installation and LineUp Handbooks related to the specific configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 81. Handbooks common to all Alcatel Radio Transmission products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 82. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 83. Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 84. Handbooks related to the products hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 85. Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 86. IEC 950 Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 87. Label references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 88. Example of correspondence between CS and suffix + ICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 89. Hardware setting documentation cross references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 90. List of enclosed hardware setting documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 91. List of enclosed Annexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
368
370
377
387
414
415
425
429
433
435
447
453
455
459
467
468
468
469
469
470
470
471
471
490
496
507
510
511
513
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
13 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
14 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
HANDBOOK GUIDE
SECTION CONTENT
ED
955.203.292 Q
PAGE
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
16
QUICK GUIDE
17
SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

20
Chapter 1 Document Guide

21
03
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
15 / 514

PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
Warranty
Any warranty must be referred exclusively to the terms of the contact of sale of the equipment this
handbook refers to.
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or
special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
b)
Information
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.
c)
Copyright Notification
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
d)
Safety recommendations
The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or
damage to the equipment:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
e)
ED
1)
Service Personnel
Installation and service must be carried out by authorized people having appropriate technical
training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and
service and of measures to avoid any danger to them, to any other people and to the equipment.
2)
Access to the Equipment

Access to the Equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only.
3)
Safety norms
Recommended safety norms are indicated in this manual as described in para.19.3 on pages
484 on.
Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in this handbook should
be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In the case of conflict between safety
instructions stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local
norms will prevail. Should not local regulations be mandatory, then safety norms in this manual
will prevail.
Service Personnel skill

Service Personnel must have been an adequate technical training on telecommunications and in
particular on the equipment this handbook refers to.
Without an adequate training, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in
para.18.2 on page 466 is usually not enough to properly install, operate and maintain equipment.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
16 / 514

a)
QUICK GUIDE
N.B.
In the documentation on CDROM, this table represent hyperlinks to the referenced parts.
Tab. 1. Quick guide

If you need immediate operative information on how to:
GENERAL TOPICS
get information on system
documentation
read chapter 18 on page 465 of this handbook
have a very short description of the

system
read para.2.4 on pages 51 thru 62 of this handbook

in this handbook, for:
logically configure a station (or

change its configuration) and
logically provision equipment boards
have details on system cabling
BaseBand and Transceiver shelves as a whole, read

para.3.5 on page 129
units in BaseBand shelf, read para.3.6.1 on page 135
units in Transceiver shelf, read para.3.7.2 on page 156
units in FANS shelf, read para.3.9.1 & 3.9.2 on page 169
units in OPTINEX rack and ADM shelf, refer to

handbooks cited in para.18.2.2 on page 471
read chapter 4 starting on page 175 of this handbook

common parts (frequency independent), read para.3.2

on page 122
frequency dependent items, refer to the specific chapter

listed in Tab. 67. on page 414
get item P/Ns (LHR)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 1. continues ..
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
17 / 514
GENERAL TOPICS FOR INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE

get information on safety, EMC,
ESD norms and equipment labelling
read chapter 19 on page 483 of this handbook

get operative information regarding

the units (connectors, leds, buttons,
hardware setting)
carry out unit hardware setting
TRU: read para.3.4 on page 128
SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit: read

para.3.6.2 on page 140
SERVICE and ADDITIONAL

RRACHANNEL: read para.3.6.4 on page 147
RRASTANDBY: read para.3.6.5 on page 149
MODEM: read para.3.6.6 on page 150
PSU and PSF: read para.3.6.7 on page 153
Additional Housekeeping unit: read para.3.6.8 on page

154
Transceiver units: read para.3.7.4 on page 158
Branching: read para.3.8 on page 168
FANS: read para.3.9.3 on page 171
Kit Loudspeaker: read para.3.6.9 on page 155
VOICE
unit:
read
read para.20.2 on page 507 of this handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 1. continues ..
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
18 / 514

.. continues Tab. 1.

INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
physically install and cable the
equipment hardware
get Installation Handbook (Ref.[E] on page 469) and

proceed as specified by it
for:
install or update Craft Terminals

and/or equipments software
SWP R.1.0, get relevant CT Operators Handbook

(Ref.[C] on page 468
SWP R.2.0, get relevant CT Operators Handbook

(Ref.[D] on page 468
and read read its QUICK GUIDE (same topics)
commission equipment
get Lineup Guide (Ref.[F] on page 469) and proceed as

specified by it
MAINTENANCE
provision and manage spare parts
carry out routine maintenance
carry out corrective maintenance
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To find any other kind of information not listed in the above table, please start reading para.1.4 on page
23, and then search the information according to the handbook structure described.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
19 / 514
SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

Please refer to Chapter 19 on page 483 to obtain details regarding following information:
Compliance with European norms
Safety rules:
TOPIC

a)
WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
General rules
Dangerous Electrical Voltages
Harmful optical signals
Risk of explosion
Moving mechanical parts
Heatradiating mechanical parts

Microwave radiations
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges:

TOPIC
WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
b)
ED
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)
Other Labels affixed to the Equipment
Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, WorkStation etc., other than ALCATELs,
loaded with software applications described in this or other Handbooks, is supplied in the
Constructors technical documentation.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
20 / 514
1 DOCUMENT GUIDE

1.1 Introduction
This chapter contains all information regarding this handbook and is organized as follows:
Handbook applicability
herebelow
Purpose of the handbook
on page 22
Handbook structure
on page 23
Handbook history
on page 25
List of symbols and abbreviations
on page 29
1.2 Handbook applicability

This handbook applies to the following product-releases:
PRODUCT
RELEASE
ANV P/N
FACTORY P/N
9640LSY
(3.6 4.2 GHz)
1.00.00
3DB 00581 AAAA
522.171.110
2.00.00
3DB 04272 AAAA
522.171.120
9647LSY
(4.4 5.0 GHz)
1.00.00
3DB 00584 AAAA
522.171.210
2.00.00
3DB 04274 AAAA
522.171.220
9662LSY
(5.9 6.4 GHz)
1.00.00
3DB 00587 AAAA
522.171.310
2.00.00
3DB 04276 AAAA
522.171.320
9667LSY
(6.4 7.1 GHz)
1.00.00
3DB 00590 AAAA
522.171.410
2.00.00
3DB 04278 AAAA
522.171.420
9674LSY
(7.1 7.7 GHz)
1.00.00
3DB 00593 AAAA
522.171.510
2.00.00
3DB 04280 AAAA
522.171.520
9681LSY
(7.7 8.7 GHz)
1.00.00
3DB 00596 AAAA
522.171.610
2.00.00
3DB 04282 AAAA
522.171.620
9610LSY
(10 10.7 GHz)
1.00.00
2.00.00
3DB 04288 AAAA
522.171.920
9611LSY
(10.7 11.7 GHz)
1.00.00
3DB 00599 AAAA
522.171.710
2.00.00
3DB 04284 AAAA
522.171.720
9613LSY
(12.75 13.25 GHz)
1.00.00
3DB 02270 AAAA
522.171.810
2.00.00
3DB 04286 AAAA
522.171.820
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
in the following configurations:
LHR Regenerator
related WMSN (LHR + 1650SMC)
Please refer to para.18.2 on page 466 for further information.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
21 / 514
This handbook belongs to the Customer Documentation set envisaged for the equipment specified in para.
1.2 on page 21.
Please refer to chapter 18 on page 465 to have the list and description of such Customer Documentation
set.
With reference to equipment configuration stated in para.1.2 on page 21, this handbook provides the
following pieces of information:
system description on two levels: first level and detailed level, both from system, hardware and
software points of view
system Technical Specifications
system hardware structure: item Part Numbers and equipping rules (provisioning)
unit operative hardware description: access point description (usage of led, pushbuttons, switches
and connectors for Customer use), connection rules, hardware setting options
system cabling
spare parts provisioning
preventive maintenance procedures
corrective maintenance and unit replacement procedures (N.B.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
In any case, the C.T. Operators Handbook must be always available to the Operator in
charge of the equipment troubleshooting and repair, as it contains the information
necessary to carry out troubleshooting through the Craft Terminal.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
22 / 514

1.3 Purpose of the handbook

1.4 Handbook Structure

This handbook is composed by a main handbook and enclosed documents. Information is divided into
the following main sections and levels as detailed in the table of contents:
MAIN HANDBOOK
N.B.
A summary description of the contents is given at the beginning of each chapter.

INFORMATIVE LEVEL
OPERATIVE LEVEL
SECTION HANDBOOK GUIDE
Chapter 1 Document Guide

It contains all information regarding this
handbook.
SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
It describes all the equipment general and detailed system features including its application in the
telecommunication network. Furthermore, it supplies the equipment description and specifications. The
description is organized in the following levels:
Chapter 2 System Description

It gives the firstlevel description of 9600LSY
equipment in both LHR Regenerator and
WMSN (LHR+1650SMC) configurations.
The information given should be enough to
understand the equipment composition and
operation and to read the operative level
chapters as well as the description second
level
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Quick Guide
It allows to access immediately the most
frequently needed operative pieces of
information contained in this handbook, in its
enclosed documents and in other related
handbooks.
Chapter 5 Functional Description

It gives the secondlevel description of
9600LSY equipment in the LHR Regenerator
configuration. Reading this chapter is not
necessary to carry out standard installation
commissioning and maintenance activities.
Chapter 6 Technical Specifications

It supplies in detail the technical
characteristics of the 9600LSY in LHR
Regenerator configuration
Chapter 3 Physical Configuration

It gives detailed operative information
regarding LHR Regenerator configuration
only:
the equipments items (P/Ns, equipping

rules, labels for remote inventory)
their physical and logical position in the

system
the unit assembly/subassembly and

front panel drawings, with the usage
description of the access points
(connectors, visual indicators, buttons)
hardware setting description
summary and operative information on

characteristics of external interfaces
Chapter 4 System Cabling
It gives in detail information regarding the
system cabling of the LHR Regenerator as
well as that for the connections between LHR
and 1650SMC; moreover it gives the pinout
description of connectors for Customer usage
table continues
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
23 / 514
table continues
HANDBOOK
INFORMATIVE LEVEL
OPERATIVE LEVEL
SECTION MAINTENANCE
Chapter 7 Maintenance
It describes the routine and corrective
maintenance of 9600USY equipment in the
LHR Regenerator configuration.
SECTION FREQUENCY PLANS AND PART NUMBERS

It is the frequencydependent part of the handbook. It includes the following chapters:
Chapter 8 Introduction to section Frequency plans & part numbers

It gives general information regarding the use of the subsequent chapters.
Each one of the subsequent chapters x is devoted to a specific 96xxLSY product and includes
two main paragraphs:
x.1 96xxLSY part list: the Part Numbers and the Remote Inventory Labels of the
frequencydependent items (Transceivers) are given;
x.2 96xxLSY frequency plans: the various frequency plans envisaged are described.
SECTION APPENDICES
Chapter 18 Documentation Guide

It contains all information regarding the
Customer Documentation set this handbook
belongs to.
Chapter 19 SafetyEMCESD norms and

equipment labelling
It describes the equipment labelling and the
norms mandatory or suggested that must be
considered to avoid injuries on persons
and/or damage to the equipment.
SECTION HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES
Chapter
20
Hardware
Setting
Documentation & Annexes
It lists the enclosed documents having P/N
different from that of this handbook (they can
be used also as annexes to other handbooks)
and describes how to use the Hardware
Setting Documents enclosed.
ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
INFORMATIVE LEVEL
OPERATIVE LEVEL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
a)
b)
ED
documents describing branching

branchingtranceivers connections)
documents related to hardware setting

options of the units for which they are
envisaged
configurations
(branching
drawings
and
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
24 / 514

.. continues MAIN

1.5 Handbook history

1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts
The following Tab. 2. indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.
Legend: n = new part
m = modified part
blank= part unchanged
The revision bars on the tables rows indicate changes in the structure (e.g. new sections, or information
shifted within the handbook) with respect to the previous edition.
Tab. 2. Handbook history
HANDBOOK EDITION
HANDBOOK GUIDE
1.
DOCUMENT GUIDE
03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.4. Hardware components
2.5. Configurations
2.6. Radio Transmission features
2.7. Signal Transmission
2.8. Synchronization
2.9. Equipment Control
PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION
m
m
3.1. Introduction
3.2. Part list
3.3. Rack and shelves summary
3.4. Top Rack Unit (TRU)
3.5. Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR

shelves
3.7. Transceiver shelf
3.8. Branching
3.9. FANS shelf and FANS assembled units
3.6. Base Band shelf
05
2.2. Introduction to the 9600 LSY Radio System Family

2.3. Introduction to system configurations
04
2.1. Introduction
3.
02
DESCRIPTIONS
2.
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
table continues
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
25 / 514
HANDBOOK EDITION
4.
SYSTEM CABLING
4.1. Introduction
4.2. Shelves connectors
5.
6.
4.4. Power supply distribution connections
4.5. Signal connections between shelves
4.6. ModemTransceiverBranching connections
4.7. External interfaces
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
02
03
m
m
n
n
5.2. Equipment Control Subsystem
5.3. Power supply subsystem
5.4. Baseband subsystem
5.5. Transceiver subsystem
5.6. Fans subsystem
6.3. Transceiver Characteristics

6.4. Regenerator and Modem Characteristics
6.5. Branching interfaces
6.6. Protections
6.7. Environmental characteristics
6.8. Optical Safety
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
7.1. Introduction
7.2. Warnings
7.4. Alarm Description
7.5. Set of spare parts
7.6. Routine Maintenance
7.7. Corrective Maintenance
7.8. Faulty unit repair and Repair Form
7.3. Instruments and accessories
05
5.1. Introduction
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
04
n
n
6.2. System Characteristics
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
01
4.3. Cable kits and cable types
6.1. Introduction
7.

table continues
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
26 / 514

HANDBOOK EDITION
FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS
01
02
m
m
8.
INTRODUCTION TO SECTION
9.
9640 LSY
10. 9647 LSY
11. 9662 LSY
12. 9667 LSY
13. 9674 LSY
14. 9681 LSY
15. 9610 LSY

16. 9611 LSY
17. 9613 LSY
APPENDICES
m
n
18.2. Productreleaseversion handbook

18.3. General on Alcatel Customer Documentation
19. SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

19.1. Introduction
n
n
19.2. Compliance with European Norms
19.3. Safety Rules
19.4. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)
19.5. Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
19.6. Suggestions, notes and cautions
19.7. Labels affixed to the Equipment
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES
20. HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES
ED
05
18.1. Introduction
20.1. Introduction
20.2. Hardware setting documents explanation
20.3. List of enclosed documents (N.B.)
N.B.
04
18. DOCUMENTATION GUIDE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
03
the list of the enclosed documents is not stated in this table. The enclosed documents are listed
in Tab. 90. on page 511 and Tab. 91. on page 513.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
27 / 514
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01ADRAFT
1.5.3 Notes on Ed.01

Ed.01 created on November 15, 2001 is the first validated and officially released issue.

Ed.02 created on April 18, 2002.
The following main changes have been done:
the handbook structure has been modified: please read para.1.4 (Handbook Structure) on page 23;
in Chapter 3 Physical Configuration : Part List has been updated; descriptions regarding
equipment provisioning and unit operative information have been updated and improved
in Chapter 6 Technical Specifications : Branching Interface description has been added, and
Environmental characteristics description has been improved
Chapter 7 Maintenance has been improved with revised and fully new parts, in particular with
regard to information relevant to Spare Part Set, Preventive Maintenance and Corrective
Maintenance (troubleshooting and unit replacement procedures)
the new Chapter 8 Documentation Guide has been updated to list and describe new handbooks
in the new Chapter 9 SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling : information regarding
equipment labelling has been updated
in Chapter 19 Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : the list of enclosed documents
has been updated
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Ed.03 created on September 27, 2002.

The following main changes have been done:
the handbook structure has been modified: please read para.1.4 (Handbook Structure) on page 23
throughout the handbook:
new items added: Frequency Reuse kit, Kit Loudspeaker (P/N and operative information)
elimination of High Power Transceivers
important changes and improvements regarding Transceivers:
operative information in chapters 3 Physical Configuration and 4 System Cabling
description in chapter 5 Functional Description
spare part list and fully new repair procedure in chapter 7 Maintenance
in chapter 3 Physical Configuration circuit breaker values updated
Chapter 6 Technical Specifications updated
in section Frequency Plans & Part Numbers: new chapter for 9610LSY, new Transceiver for
9681LSY
in Chapter 19 Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : the list of enclosed documents
has been updated.
Errors found in previous edition have been corrected.
Revision bars point out major (listed above) and minor (not listed above) modifications with respect to
Ed.02.
Revision bars in correspondence of empty lines or empty table rows, point out parts eliminated or shifted
in other places of the handbook.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
28 / 514

Ed.01A created on October 23, 2001 is the first NEITHER validated NOR officially released issue.
1.6 List Of Symbols And Abbreviations

Tab. 3. List Of Symbols

N.B.
This Table Lists Some Symbols Whose Interpretation Could Be Doubtful.

SYMBOL
MEANING AND COMMENTS

In this handbook it is not the division symbol. It means from .. to ...
E.g.:
<value1> <value2>
means:
from <value1> (included) to <value2> (included)
A polarization symbol like this:
POLARIZATION can be assumed as either horizontal

SYMBOLS
Once you have decided a polarization (e.g.
or vertical
H
)
)
the opposite direction symbol will be opposite polarization (e.g.

V
Tab. 4. List Of Abbreviations
MEANING
ABBREVIATION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A
AC
Alternate Current
ACSE
Association Control Service Element
ADC
Analog to Digital Converter
ADM
Add Drop Multiplexer
AE
Access Enable
AF
Atomic Function
AGC
Automatic Gain Control
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal
ALS
Automatic Laser Shutdown
AMI
Alternate Mark Inversion
ANSI
American National Standard Institute
AOW
Additional Order Wire
API
Access Point Identifier
APS
Automatic Protection Switching
ASE
Application Service Element
ASIC
Application Specific Integrated Circuit
AT
Attend alarm
ATL
Far Terminal Alarm
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATPC
Automatic Transmitter Power Control
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
29 / 514
MEANING
ATTD
ATTendeD
AUG
Administration Unit Group
AUn
Administrative Unit n (Order)
AUX
AUXiliary
B
BB
Base Band
BBE
Background Block Error
BCA
Common Battery Dial Pulsing (Telephone Set)
BER
Bit Error Rate
BIPx
Bit Interleaved Parity x

C
CAN
Controller Area Network (communication protocol patented by Robert

Bosch GmbH)
CCDP
CoChannel Dual Polarized (Frequency reuse)
CFRD
Component Failure Rate Date
C/I
Carrier to Interference ratio
CK
Clock
CMI
Code Mark Inversion
CMISE
Common Management Information Service Element
CPU
Central Processor Unit
CRCn
Cyclic Redundancy Check n
CRU
Clock Reference Unit
CSW
Common SoftWare
CTP
Connection Termination Point
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
D
DA
Distant Alarm
DC
Direct Current
DCC
Data Communication Channels (D1D12)
DCC/M
Multiplex Section DCC (D4D12)
DCC/R
Regenerator Section DCC (D1D3)
DCN
Data Communication Network
DEFEC
FEC Decoder
DEM
Demodulator
DF
Dialog Failure
DIV
Diversity
DM
Degraded Minute
DS
Defect Second
DTI
Department of Trade and Industry
DTMF
Dual Tone MultiFrequency

E
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
30 / 514

ABBREVIATION

ABBREVIATION
MEANING
EB
Error Block
EBC
Errored Block Count
EC
Equipment Controller
ECC
Embedded Control Channel
ECS
External Communication Service
ECT
Equipment Craft Terminal
EE
Equipment Engineering
EF
Equipment Failure
EIA
Electronic Industries Association
EMC
ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
EMF
Equipment Management Function
EOW
Engineering Order Wire
EPS
Equipment Protection Switching
ES
Error Second
ETR
European Telecommunication Report
ETS
European Telecommunication Standard
ETSI
European Telecommunication Standard Institute
EW
Early Warning
EWH
Early Warning High
EWL
Early Warning Low
EXCBER
Excessive BER
F
FE
Front End
FEBE
Far End Block Error
FEC
Forward Error Correction (Code)
FERF
Far End Receiver Failure
FIT
Failure Unit
FR
Failure rate
FSRC
Failed Switch Request Count
FSRD
Failed Switch Request Duration

G
GB
Ground Benign
GF
Ground Fixed
GM
Ground Mobile
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
H
HBER
High Bit Error Rate
HDLC
High level Data Link Control
HET
Heterofrequency (Radio system configuration)
HEW
High Early Warning
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
31 / 514
MEANING
HK
HouseKeeping
HPT
High order Path Termination
HPC
High order Path Connection
HS
High Speed
HST
Hot StandBy

ABBREVIATION
I
ID
IDentifier
IDU
InDoor Unit
IEC
International Electro technical Commission
IF
Intermediate Frequency
IRC
International Radiotechnical Commission
ISO
International Standard Organization
ISPB
Intra Shelf Parallel Bus
ISSB
Intra Shelf Serial Bus
ITUR
International Telecommunication Union Radiocommunication
ITUT
International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication

L
LAN
Local Area Network
LBER
Low Bit Error Rate
LC
Loss of Configuration
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LEW
Low Early Warning
LHR
Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator
LHRC
Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Compact
LO
Local Oscillator
LOF
Loss Of Frame
LOP
Loss Of Pointers
LOS
Loss Of Signal
LPA
Lower order Path Adaptation
LPT
Lower order Path Termination
LS
Low Speed
LSY
Long haul SYstem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
M
MC
Monitoring Channel
MCF
Message Communication Function
MDT
Mean Dawn Time
MIR
Loss of incoming pulses
MLC
Multi Level Coding
MMIC
Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit
MOD
Modulator
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
32 / 514

ABBREVIATION
MEANING
MS
Multiplex Section
MSA
Multiplex Section Adaptation
MSAIS
Multiplex Section Alarm Indication Signal
MSOH
Multiplex Section OverHead
MSP
Multiplex Section Protection
MSRDI
Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication
MSREI
Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication
MST
Multiplex Section Termination
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR
Mean Time To Repair

N
NA
Not Applicable
NDS
Nearend Defect Second
NE
Network Element
NEBC
Nearend Errored Block Count
NEFA
Network Element Function Application
NF
Noise Figure
NFD
Net Filter Discrimination
NG
Not Urgent
NRZ
Non Return to Zero
NURG
Not Urgent
O
OCT
Office Craft Terminal
ODU
OutDoor Unit
OFS
Out of Frame Second
OH
OverHead
O&M
Operation and Maintenance
OIRT
Russian Regulatory Body
OOF
Out Of Frame
OS
Operation System
OVF
Overflow
OW
Order Wire
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
P
PC
Personal Computer
PDH
Plesiocronus Digital Hierarchy
PI
Physical Interface
PLL
Phase Locked Loop
PM
Performance Monitoring
POH
Path Overhead
PSA
Protection Switch Actual
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
33 / 514
MEANING
PSAC
Protection Switch Count
PSAD
Protection Switch Actual Duration
PSR
Protection Switch Request
PSU
Power Supply Unit

ABBREVIATION
Q
QAM
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QOS
Quality Of Service
R
RAPS
Radio Automatic Protection Switch
RC
Radio Controller
RCIM
Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch
RCT
Remote Craft Terminal
RECT
Remote Equipment Craft Terminal
RES
Radio Equipment and Systems
RF
Radio Frequency
RFCOH
Radio Frame Complementary Overhead
RL
Received Level
RLTS
Received Level Threshold Second
ROSE
Remote Operation Service Element
RPI
Radio Physical Interface
RPS
Radio Protection Switching
RRA
Radio Regenerator Adaptation
RRR
Radio Relay Repeaters
RRT
Radio Relay Terminals
RS
Regenerator Section
RSOH
Regenerator Section Overhead
RSPI
Radio Synchronous Physical Interface
RST
Regeneration Section Termination
RTF
Remote Terminal Failure
RX
Receiver/Received
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
S
SA
Service Alarm
SBL
Security Block
SC
System Controller
SD
Space Diversity
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SEMF
Synchronous Equipment Management Function
SERS
Synchronous E1 Regeneration Section
SES
Severly Errored Seconds
SETS
Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
34 / 514

ABBREVIATION
MEANING
SF
Signal Failure
SNCP
Sub Network Connection Protection
SOH
Section Overhead
SOHF
SOH Failure
SPI
Synchronous Physical Interface
SPS
Synchronous Path Sink
SR
Synchronous Radio
SRMR
Synchronous Radio Modem (Assembly) for Repeater
SRMT
Synchronous Radio Modem (Assembly) for Terminal
SRST
Synchronous Radio baseband (Assembly) for Terminal
SRSR
Synchronous Radio baseband (Assembly) for Repeater
SSM
Synchronisation Status Message
STBY
Standby
STMN
Synchronous Transport Module N (Hierarchic level)
STM0
51 Mbit transmission bit rate
SU
Supervisory Unit
SW
Switch
T
TA
TeleAlarms
TAT
Turn Around Time
TC
Terminal Connector / Tandem Connection
TEM
Transversal Electric Mode
TIM
Trace Identifier Mismatch
TL
Transmitted Level
TLTS
Transmitted Level Threshold Second
TM
Transmission and Multiplexing
TMN
Telecommunication Management Network
TP
Termination Point
TPH
Telephone
TR
TRansceiver
TRU
Top Rack Unit
TTP
Trail Termination Point
TUn
Tributary Unit n (Order)
TUGn
Tributary Unit Group n (Order)
TX
Transmitter/Transmitted
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
U
U
Unavailability
UDR
Unpressurized Rectangular Waveguide Type
UG
Urgent Alarm
UHM
Urban Haul split mount terminal Multiplexer
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
35 / 514
ABBREVIATION
MEANING
Urban Haul split mount terminal Regenerator
USK
Stackable Unit
UT
Unavailability Time

UHR
V
VCn
Virtual Container n (Order)
VCO
Voltage Controlled Oscillator
VF
Voice Frequency
VHM
Virtual Hardware Machine

W
WADM
Wireless Add and Drop Multiplexer
WLT
Wireless Line Terminal
WST
Way Side Traffic
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
X
XPD
Cross Polar Discrimination
XPIC
Cross Polar Interference Cancelled
XPI
Cross Polar Interference
XPIF
Cross Polar Improvement Factor
XPOL
Cross Polar/Polarization
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
36 / 514

DESCRIPTIONS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SECTION CONTENT
ED
PAGE
Chapter 2 System Description
39
Chapter 3 Physical Configuration
121
Chapter 4 System Cabling
175
Chapter 5 Functional Description
215
Chapter 6 Technical Specifications
315
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
37 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
38 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.1 Introduction
This chapter gives the firstlevel description of 9600LSY equipment in the LHR configuration, and
comprehends the following main paragraphs:
para.2.2 on page 40
Introduction to the 9600LSY Radio System Family

This paragraph explains briefly the characteristics of 9600LSY equipment
family.
para.2.3 on page 47
Introduction to system configurations

This paragraph introduces the system composition of the 9600LSY Radio
System Family, LHR configuration.
para.2.4 on page 51
Hardware components
This paragraph describes the different assemblies and shelves that can
be used to compose the available configurations of 9600LSY family, LHR
configuration.
para.2.5 on page 63
Configurations
This paragraph describes in detail the different configurations of 9600LSY
family, LHR configuration, taking into account the various peculiar
aspects.
para.2.6 on page 82
Radio Transmission features

This paragraph describes in detail the Radio Transmission features of
9600LSY family.
para.2.7 on page 97
Signal Transmission
This paragraph describes in detail the Signal Transmission features of
9600LSY family.
Synchronization
This paragraph describes in detail the Synchronization features of
9600LSY family.
Equipment Control
This paragraph introduces the Equipment control features of 9600LSY
family.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
39 / 514
2.2.1 Foreword
This paragraph explains briefly the characteristics and applications of the 9600LSY Radio System Family,
and comprehends the following main paragraphs:
para.2.2.2 herebelow
General
9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types
Main Features
Network applications
2.2.2 General
The 9600LSY digital radio relay system belongs to the second generation of the Alcatel SDH
(Synchronous Digital Hierarchy ) radio family that has been developed aiming to match the demand of
high quality microwave transmission links and following the SDH standards defined by International
Organizations as ITUT, ITUR and ETSI. Special attention concerning the network management
standards and its integration into a SDH based network has been paid.
Big efforts have been done to expand as much as possible the versatility of the new radio family and the
full compatibility with the optical systems to ensure the utilization of the radio media as natural complement
to the optical fibre transmission.
A 9600LSY radio system can be in fact utilized either with multiplex section termination (MST) or
regenerator section termination (RST) functionality, can be used for optical loop closures or for fibre optic
backup, for spurs or for backbone links and, in general, in all the network interconnections where the
advantages due to an easy installation, a fast commissioning operations and time and cost saving solution
are requested.
The family supports radio transmission of STM0 (51 Mbps) and STM1 (155 Mbps) signals as well
STM4 (622 Mbps) or STM16 (2.4 Gbps) connections, using a proper number of radio frequency
channels in various configurations.
A full set of synchronous and plesiochronous interfaces is available.
By means of the new 9600LSY family, Alcatel intends to answer the growing demand of transmission
capacity either for traditional telephone services or for the new dataoriented services (including ATM +
IP networks, LAN/WAN networks) or for the evolution of the cellular market.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Alcatel 9600LSY system architecture, based on a full indoor structure, covers all the frequency bands
from 4 to 13 GHz in a complete set of equipment configurations from 2 to 8 channels in protected (N+1)
or unprotected (N+0) radio configurations.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
40 / 514

2.2 Introduction to the 9600LSY Radio System Family
2.2.3 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types

The 9600LSY Long Haul system is based on the following configurations:

a)
Regenerator (Network Element type LHR)

This radio system is basically composed by a rack containing up to eight transceivers, eight
modemodulators and eight RRA, and can be configured as follows:
CONFIGURATION
MIN
MAX
N+1
with/without occasional traffic
1+1
7+1
N+0
2+0
8+0
b)
Regenerator Compact (Network Element type LHRC)

This radio system is basically composed by one subrack containing up to two transceivers, two
modemodulators and two RRA, and can be configured as follows:
1+0 Terminal Regenerator
1+1/2+0 Terminal Regenerator
1:1 (with occasional traffic) Terminal Regenerator
1+1 HST (Hot Stand By) Terminal Regenerator
c)
Wireless Multi Service Node (WMSN)

This radio system consists of a Regenerator and operates together with the MUX of ALCATEL ADM
family, named 1650SMC. The assembly is called WMSN (Wireless Multi Service Node).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This handbook deals with the LHR and related WMSN configurations only. For LHRC please make
reference to the specific handbook (that has a different P/N, see Tab. 77. on page 467).
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
41 / 514
Th Alcatel 9600LSY family exploits the experience gained with the previous SDH generations of radio
equipment and provides an innovative answer to the most recent market requirements:
Total interworking with other kinds of network elements present in the network aiming to make the
network independent from transmission medium.
Full integration in the Alcatel network management platform able to manage different types of
network elements belonging to different technologies: OMSN, LT, OMSG, microwave radios, optical
systems and submarine systems. 9600LSY is included in Alcatel network release plan, guaranteeing
consistent feature support and allowing, in case of existing SDH NEs, not to change TMN platform,
thus saving investments already done.
Double identity of the equipment that can be inserted in the SDH network as:
Radio regenerator to be easily introduced in transparent mode without affecting any

modifications to the network.
Wireless Multi Service Node (WMSN) One Side or Two Sides that can be considered as full
performance OMSN or LT with different synchronous physical interface: radio instead of fibre.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Transmission capacity easily selectable between STM0 and STM1 according to the bandwidth
availability and, if necessary, following an incremental approach.
Bit rate capacity: the 9600LSY family allows the transmission of STM1 signals for all frequency
bands from 4 to 13 GHz and STM0 for 7, 8 and 13 GHz bands, according to the customer needs.
The system allows an easy migration from STM0 to STM1 (only hardware and software
presettings are necessary) when the traffic and the band requirements are going to change.
Auxiliary traffic can be added by means of RFCOH bytes corresponding to one 2 Mbit/s Way Side
Traffic in STM1 case. Way Side Traffic in STM0 case is not available.
Usage of 128 QAM as standard modulation. The high number of levels utilised allows to obtain a high
spectrum efficiency that permits the utilisation of the following channel spacing :
28 MHz, 29 MHz, 29.65 MHz, 30 MHz and 40 MHz for STM1 capacity
14 MHz for STM0 capacity.
Adoption of frequency reuse technique as option for all the supported frequency bands, allowing
the transmission of 2x STM1 per channel: the way utilised to improve the spectrum efficiency is
based on the CoChannel Dual Polarisation (CCDP) technique.
This technique, consisting in transmitting two different STM1 channels on each radio channel
utilising two different antenna polarisation, has been consolidated in the recent past by means of field
proven results.
In order to meet ITUR transmission quality objectives also in unfavourable propagation condition
causing XPD degradation, Crosspolar Interface Canceller (XPIC) device is adopted to minimise the
negative effects of the crosspolar interference signal, assuring an improvement factor of approx.
18 dB to the cross polar antenna discrimination.
The function is implemented in an optional additional card to be plugged on each couple of
demodulator boards of reused channel.
Particular attention has been paid to the scalability of the system, allowing the extension of a
deployed alternate polar (AP) system to a CCDP reused system only when necessary and
consequently to a progressive investment.
Two possible ways of extension and configurations are available:
CCDP configurations using 2 protection channels up to 2 x (8+1)
CCDP configurations using only 1 protection channel up to 7 working channels plus 1 standby.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
42 / 514

2.2.4 Main features

The frequency reuse is applicable to STM1 streams in all the frequency bands and with all the
channel spacing foreseen in the ITUR recommendations, while it is not available in case of STM0
transmission.
Space Diversity reception as countermeasure against fading exploiting the new baseband
combiner.
Further powerful multipath countermeasures: multichannel hitless switch, transversal equaliser,

configurable ATPC functionality, multileved coded modulation.
High reliability in order to minimise field intervention.
Fully software configurable terminals with software download capabilities.
Protections:
Different protection types are available for the 9600LSY systems: Radio Protection and Network
Protection:
Radio Protection (RPS).

The high capacity long haul radio systems utilises, to perform the automatic protection of the
radio channels, a multichannel switching device moving the channel to be protected on a spare
bearer (standby channel). The function, implemented on the RX side is N+1 hitless type; it is
transparent to other types of protection and in particular to network protection.
The switch supplies the protection of the link either in case of failure of the equipment or for
improving the quality performances of the link. In this last case the Early Warning criteria are
utilised to achieve an error free changeover.
Network Protection.
For network protection the radio system in regenerator section configuration (RRA) will be fully
transparent to APS channel and criteria allowing the OMSNs present in the network to perform
the network protection activity. On the other hand the radio system in multiplex section
configuration (WMSN) implements, as embedded function, network protection features like
Trail protection and subnetwork protection (APS, SNCP etc.).
High integration of the full indoor structure with very compact size: configurations up to 8+0/7+1
terminal are housed inside a single N3 ETSI rack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The characteristics Alcatel 9600LSY are compliant with current SDH standards defined within the
International Organisations ITUT, ITUR and ETSI, with special attention to those standards concerning
the network management and its integration into SDH based network.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
43 / 514
The 9600LSY series features the 128 QAM modulation offering excellent spectrum efficiency and covering
the following frequency bands:
SYSTEM
FREQUENCY (GHz)
9640 LSY
(L4)
3.64.2
9647 LSY
(U4)
4.45.0
9662 LSY
(L6)
5.96.4
9667 LSY
(U6)
6.47.1
9674 LSY
7.17.7
9681 LSY
7.78.7
9610 LSY
1010.7
9611 LSY
10.711.7
9613 LSY
12.75 13.25

Tab. 5. 9600LSY radio family
In general, the equipment of this family may work, in case of for STM1 stream, in cochannel frequency
reuse operation (CCDP), utilizing the XPIC optional kit, allowing the transmission of 2 x STM1 signals
on a single RF channel.
Reused configurations are not foreseen for STM0 capacity.
In the following Tab. 6. the available users interfaces are listed depending on the 9600LSY station types
(Regenerator or WMSN).
Tab. 6. 9600LSY user interfaces
REGENERATOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
INTERFACES
ED
WMSN
STM1
STM0
STM1
STM0
STM1 ELECTRICAL G.708
X
(STM1
subequipped)
X
(STM1
subequipped)
STM1 OPTICAL S1.1 G.957
X
(STM1
subequipped)
X
(STM1
subequipped)
STM1 OPTICAL L1.1 G.957
STM1 OPTICAL L1.2 G.957
140 Mbit/s
G.703
3 x 45 Mbit/s
G.703
X
(1 x 45 Mbit/s)
3 x 34 Mbit/s
G.703
X
(1 x 34 Mbit/s)
63 x 2 Mbit/s
G.703
X
(21 x 2 Mbit/s)
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
44 / 514

2.2.5 Network applications of the 9600LSY equipment

The new generation of radio transmission system Alcatel 9600LSY family is specifically designed to
provide a radio solution suitable for a large number of applications, including:
New full radio infrastructures

Closure of STM1, STM4 and STM16 fiber optic rings
Backup to fiber optic trunk links
Radio spurs of fiber/radio at STMn level
Utilization as backbone link in national trunk networks.
Interconnection of cellular networks with public switched networks.
In the following figures, some typical network applications are depicted.
RADIO
RADIO
RADIO
REG.
REPEAT.
REG.
LT
LT
Backbone, fiber backup NxSTM1 (RRA, repeater)

WLT
WLT
RADIO
RADIO
RADIO
REG.
REPEAT.
REG.
LT
LT
Backbone, fiber backup NxSTM1 (WLT, repeater)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 1. Backbone
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
45 / 514
RADIO
RADIO
REG.
REG.
ADM

Ring closure STM16

2x(8+0 / 8+1)
ADM
ADM
RADIO
RADIO
REG.
REG.
Radio spurs 1+1/3+1

Fig. 2. Ring clousure and radio spurs
RADIO
REG.
RADIO
REG.
RADIO
REG.
ADM
ADM
ADM
ADM
Ring closure STM4 (4+0 / 4+1east west)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 3. Ring clousure
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
46 / 514

2.3 Introduction to system configurations

2.3.1 Foreword
This paragraph introduces the system composition of the 9600LSY Radio System Family, and
comprehends the following main paragraphs:
Station types and configurations
Channel configurations and protection schemes
The handbook part that should be read before starting this paragraph is:
para.2.2 on page 40
Introduction to the 9600LSY Radio System Family
2.3.2 Station types and configurations

Station types
A complete terminal station utilizing a maximum of 8 radio channels is housed inside a single ETSI rack
that, depending on the customer request, can be 2200 or 2000 mm high. The 1800 mm rack cannot be
utilized.
The structure of the equipment has been developed aiming to obtain a very simple structure, with an
integration as high as possible and reducing at the minimum the number of different functional blocks
and, inside each of them, reducing the number of different units and cards.
These concepts have led to obtain an equipment structure only composed by the following functional
blocks (see Fig. 4. on page 48):
a radio assembly containing all the radio frequency and medium frequency circuits (transceiver shelf)
a baseband subrack containing all the unit devoted to the modulation and demodulation functions,
RRA functions, services management, radio protection switching and system controlling.
a branching unit deployed at the top and bottom sides of the transceiver subrack.
a Top Rack Unit (T.R.U.) for D.C.. primary power distribution and battery protection.
a fan subrack, foreseen for all the configurations.
a compact ADM 1650SMC with its additional fan subrack, that , when required, can be installed into
the rack to perform all the functionalities managed by a multiplex section.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The configurations are easily expansible, passing from a lower one to a higher one simply adding, inside
each functional block, the units needed to support the new radio channels utilized.
In particular, the branching unit is equipped in advance with the channel circulators needed for the
expansion up to 7+1, to consent to expand the radio terminal just connecting the RF filters to the branching,
without the necessity to disassemble the branching itself.
Thanks to a new design of narrow RF filters , the frequency reuse, available in all the frequency bands,
can be obtained avoiding the utilization of the 3 dB hybrids for all the bands and all the frequency
spacings, including 28 MHz.
Despite to the new high integration of the LSY systems and thanks to volume decrease obtained on the
branching, the space diversity optional functionality is supplied in all the configuration up to 7+1/8+0.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
47 / 514
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND
SHELF)
ADDITIONAL
HOUSEKEEPING
(optional)
FANS FOR
RRA/MODEM

TRU
TRU
1650
SMC
SHELF
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND
SHELF)
Rx
BRANCHING
Rx
BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER
SHELF
TRANSCEIVER
SHELF
Tx
BRANCHING
Tx
BRANCHING
REGENERATOR
WMSN
FANS FOR
1650SMC
Fig. 4. Regenerator and WMSN station rack configuration

The Alcatel 9600LSY systems offer a full set of system configuration and protection schemes to meet any
specific need in a network with a high degree of flexibility.
Two are the envisaged station types, each supplying different functionality:
Regenerator station (RST):

is needed when the RSOH termination and MSOH transparency are requested. I/O network
interface is STM1 electrical or optical.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Multiplex station (MST):

is necessary when a Wireless Multiservice Node (WMSN) (one side or two sides) has to be
implemented. In this case the MST station is used at the terminal ends of the radio link and it gives
the possibility to provide synchronous STM1 electrical and optical interfaces and plesiochronous
140 Mbit/s, 3x45 Mbit/s, 3x34 Mbit/s, 63x2 Mbit/s interfaces.
It is possible to implement a full multiplex section features like synchronization, SOH termination,
network protection (SNCP/I, SNCP/N and linear MSP), VCs cross connection, tributary adddrops.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
48 / 514

The maximum number of plesiochronous interfaces that are alternatively allowed by 1650SMC are
as follows:
up to 3 cards 4x140 Mb/s. In this case the limitation is introduced by the LSY radio system that
can transmit up to 8 x STM1 channels.
up to 3 cards 3x34 Mb/s , utilizing 3x STM1 (or 3+1 STM1 in case of protection) channels radio
side.
up to 3 cards 3x34 Mb/s, utilizing 3x STM1 (or 3+1 STM1 in case of protection) channels radio
side.
up to 3 cards 21x2 Mb/s , utilizing 1x STM1 (or 1+1 STM1 in case of protection) channels radio
side.
In the last three cases, if a single stream 34 Mb/s or 45 Mb/s or 21x2 Mb/s is required, an
underequipped STM1 is utilized toward the radio baseband and a STM0 can be adopted for
transmission on air.
Station configurations
The 9600LSY family allows the radio transmission of both STM1 and STM0 utilising protected and
unprotected heterofrequency configurations N+0, N+1 type or 2x (N+1) CCDP.
The basic configurations are named as follows:
Long Haul extendible version N+1/N+2/N+0 terminal regenerator configuration (LHR)
Long Haul extendible version N+1/N+2/N+0 terminal WMSN configuration (LHR + 1650SMC)
The high integration level allows to provide several types of configurations allowing to address different
network applications :
7+1
Terminal regenerator
in 1 ETSI rack
8+0
in 1 ETSI rack
7+1
Terminal WMSN
in 1 ETSI rack
8+0
Terminal WMSN
in 1 ETSI rack
An already operating terminal regenerator can be reconfigured as a terminal WMSN simply adding a
1650SMC device to the radio regenerator equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Each configuration is easily expansible to a higher capacity just adding the foreseen expansion kits.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
49 / 514
The LHR system can interface from two up to eight channels (STM0/STM1 Electrical or Optical signals
and the corresponding Radio parts) and up to eight WST channels. The system configurations allowed
are with Radio Protection Switching (N+1 without/with Occasional Traffic) or without Radio Protection
Switching (N+0), according to the following table:
Tab. 7. LHR Terminal Regenerator System Configurations
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
N+0
N+1
N+1 &
Occasional
(1:N)
CH
CH
CH
max WST
2+0
1+1
1+1
& Occ.
2 unpr.
or 1 prot.
3+0
2+1
2+1
& Occ.
3 unpr. or
1 prot.+1 unpr.
4+0
3+1
3+1
& Occ.
4 unpr. or
1 prot.+2 unpr.
5+0
4+1
4+1
& Occ.
5 unpr. or
1 prot.+3 unpr.
6+0
5+1
5+1
& Occ.
6 unpr. or
1 prot.+4 unpr.
7+0
6+1
6+1
& Occ.
7 unpr. or
1 prot.+5 unpr.
8+0
7+1
7+1
& Occ.
8 unpr. or
1 prot.+6 unpr.
NR. of
channels
unpr.= unprotected
prot.= protected
ALL
Occ.= occasional
In N+0 configurations, channels are without protection.

In N+1 configurations, channel 0 is always the standby channel.
In N+1 & Occasional configurations (also known as 1:N protection architecture), channel 0 carries the
occasional traffic, that is cut off whenever it becomes the recovery channel for any (faulty) of the protected
channels.
As indicated in Tab. 7. above, the WST configuration is independent from N+0 / N + 1 / 1:N system
configuration. The couple of radio channels which carry both the protected service channels and WST
ones (if any) is defined via software. These channels can be chosen among the following five couples:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 8. Couples of Radio Channels that can be used for protected service channels and WST
CHx
0
0
1
1
8
N.B.
ED
CHy
1
9
2
9
9
Further information regarding protection schemes is given in para.5.2.1.5 on page 233.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
50 / 514

2.3.3 Channel configurations and protection schemes

2.4 Hardware components

2.4.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes the different assemblies and shelves that can be used to compose the available
configurations of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs:
OPTINEX Rack and Top Rack Unit

Transceiver subrack
Baseband subrack
ADM 1650SMC
FAN Subrack
System wiring
Installation materials
As far as Branching configurations are concerned, refer to para.2.5.5 on page 77.

The handbook part that should be read before starting this paragraph is:
para.2.3 on page 47
2.4.2 OPTINEX Rack and Top Rack Unit

The OPTINEX rack has been designed to be used in all the new applications of optical and radio solutions
thanks to the high room availability needed for the continuously increasing number of cable connections.
The rack is available in two different heights: 2200 and 2000 mm. They both can be used either for
regenerator or WMSN terminals. In fact, also the 2000mm version can host the terminals including the
1650SMC ADM and its fan unit.
In general, OPTINEX rack can house 19 and 21 subracks. They must be compliant with ETSI 300 1193
standard. Using 19 subracks they must be installed utilizing mechanical adaptors.
However, in the case of 9600LSY radios, the two main subracks (transceiver and baseband) are 21 wide,
so they do not need any adapter to be installed in the rack.
In the 9600LSY application, OPTINEX rack is usually supplied with the TRU unit (see para.3.4 on page
128).
For special Customer needs, OPTINEX rack can be also supplied without the TRU unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This handbook gives no detailed information on OPTINEX rack. For this purpose, please refer
to OPTINEX rack specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.1 on page 471).
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
51 / 514
2.4.3 Transceiver subrack

2.4.3.1 Mechanical assembly

The transceiver mechanical assembly has the following dimensions:
530 mm (w) x 470 mm (h) x 240 mm (d)
A complete view of the structure, fully equipped with 8 transceivers, is shown in Fig. 5.
Fig. 5. Transceiver subrack
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Each transceiver module is inserted in a vertical dedicated slot. The coaxial connections with Rx and Tx
branching units are located at the top and bottom positions of each transceiver.
Each module is equipped with the following units:
Transmitter
Receiver
Tx Local Oscillator
Rx Local Oscillator
DC/DC converter
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
52 / 514

2.4.3.2 Transceiver block diagram

A simple block diagram, illustrating the main functions performed by transceiver module, is shown in the
following Fig. 6.
Fig. 6. Single channel transceiver block diagram

The transmitter includes an IF amplifier, a SSB up converter, a local oscillator and a RF power amplifier.
The utilization of a high rejection SSB upconverter permits to avoid the use of a RF filter at the output,
allowing a wideband utilization of the unit.
The Automatic Transmitted Power Control (ATPC) function is included in the transceiver in order to
decrease the Tx power output and dissipation in case of normal propagation and to push the maximum
power up in deep fading conditions. This function may be disabled and the level of the transmitted RF
power can be manually set by Craft Terminal configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The receiver includes a low noise RF preamplifier, an automatic imagine rejection down converter, an IF
filter, a main amplifier with AGC and a local oscillator.
A space diversity receiver, to be used in junction with a baseband signal combiner, is also available as
countermeasure to the selective fading due to the multipath propagation of the signal.
The advantages obtained by the baseband combiner utilization are mainly due to a higher reliability,
thanks to the adopted digital technology, to the possibility of recovering very high delays between the two
received signals and to the very reduced signature of the combined signal.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
53 / 514
The baseband subrack is used both in regenerator terminal stations and in WMSN stations. In the first case
it is the sole baseband equipment installed in the rack; in the second it has to be associated with
1650SMC device that has to be installed in the upper right area of the rack just above the baseband
subrack.
It is mainly subdivided in three different areas:
the upper area (access area) is devoted to host the interface connectors of WST , Service channels
and remote alarms.
in the centre of the subrack the channeldepending units (RRA and Modems, up to ten) are
accommodated, together with the two common units : System Controller (SC) and the Service unit.
in the bottom part, the DC/DC converters for supplying the d.c. voltages to the RRAModem units
are allocated just under the relevant powered units. Two battery filters (including the DC/DC
converters supplying the DC power for the common units ) are also installed in this area.
2.4.4.1 Mechanical assembly
The physical dimensions of the subrack are: 490 mm (w) x 500 mm (h) x 250 mm (d).
In the following Fig. 7. , the baseband subrack is shown.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 7. Baseband subrack equipped for 7+1/8+0 configuration
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
54 / 514

2.4.4 Baseband subrack
2.4.4.2 Regenerator Terminal Block Diagram

Hereafter, the block diagram relevant to a single channel is pointed out.
REGENERATOR
MODEM BOARD
RRA BOARD
TX
ELET./OPT.
INTERFACE
STM1
RRA
HTL
SW
ATPC
SERVICE &
ATPC
RT
RX
AUX.
SERV.
Aux.SERV.
CH.
2x2 Mb/s
MODEM
MODEM
RFCOH
SYSTEM
CONTROLLER
WST
SERVICE
DCCR
UNIT
QB3
DC/DC
CONVERTER
V batt.
OS
ECT
Fig. 8. Single channel regenerator block diagram

The baseband subrack do not allow the protection neither of the physical interface (optical or electrical)
of the channel, neither of the RRA function, because the embedded switching section, included inside
each RRA unit is inserted between the RRA and modem function and therefore it protects only the radio
section (modem and transceiver). See next Fig. 9.
CH1
O/F int
RRA1
CH2
O/F int
RRA2
CH3
O/F
RRA3
CH0
O/F
RRA STBY
HITLESS SWITCH
BASEBAND SUBRACK
MODEM 1
TRANSCEIVER 1
MODEM 2
TRANSCEIVER 2
MODEM 3
TRANSCEIVER 3
MODEM STBY
TRANSCEIVER STBY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(occasional)
Fig. 9. Baseband functional protection scheme
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
55 / 514
CONNECTOR
AREA
NOT USED
SERVICECEC
E STBY
RRA
RRA
MODEM
SYSTEM
CONTROLLER
MM
CONTROLLE
R
POWER
SUPPLYSUPPL
Y
NOT USED
BATTERY
FILTER
FILTER
Fig. 10. Baseband board positions
In the following, the main characteristics of each unit is reported.
2.4.4.3 RRA board
Performs the following main functions :
STM1 bidirectional interface, electrical or optical selectable by means of interchangeable

plugins
Extraction/Insertion RSOH line side to/from Aux. Service Board
Hitless Switch functionality.

Just one unit has been developed for utilization with both STM1 and STM0 capacity.
Each RRA unit is equipped with an embedded STM1 electrical interface. As an option, a S 1.1
STM1 optical interface can be used instead. This optical interface is realized by a plugin unit that
can be installed in the RRA through the front panel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2.4.4.4 RRA Standby board

The unit performs the same functionalities of RRA board but, moreover, the hitless switch circuits
(Tx/Rx distributors and a switching logic unit) are is installed on board and dedicated to the radio
section protection.
The protection supplied is N+1 type and it is also utilized in 1+1 configuration .
Only one RRA STBY has been developed for utilization with both STM1 and STM0 capacity.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
56 / 514

Fig. 10. herebelow indicates the slot position of the baseband subrack where the units can be installed
in the various radio configurations.

2.4.4.5 Modem unit

Performs the following main functions:
Terminal modulator
Terminal demodulator
XPIC
Baseband signal combiner

Two different 128 QAM modems have been developed, according to the two capacities that can be
transmitted:
STM1 Modem with one 2 Mbit/s WST service stream: to be used in both alternate and copolar
frequency arrangements with all the spacings including 28 MHz.
The STM0 Modem without WST service stream: utilized in 7 , 8 and 13 GHz bands with 14
MHz channel spacing in both alternate and copolar frequency arrangements.
Each modem can be equipped with an optional plugin board . This board gives the access to the
IF signals necessary to the demodulator for XPIC or for Space Diversity functionalities. In case of
presence of both functions the modem must be equipped with two identical plugin boards.
2.4.4.6 Service Unit
The Service board provides an external access to the auxiliary service channels, utilizing SUBD
connectors in the subrack connector area. Moreover the unit manages the ATPC functionality.
Service unit consents the terminal to transmit one WST 2 Mb/s service stream in Radio Frame
Complementary OverHead in protected way on channels x and y (that can be chosen among the
couples specified in Tab. 8. on page 50), and contains the logic switching unit. The WST interface
is present on the unit front panel. The accesses to the other WST service streams that can be
transmitted one for each channel in nonprotected way are in the connector area.
2.4.4.7 System Controller
The S.C. is devoted to the equipment management. It exchanges alarms, commands and
management information with the other units of the equipment and provides the following interfaces
for local and remote management:
Channel communication for TMN utilizing a QB3 interface (BNC connector) info model based
F interface (RS232 toward the local PC) (SUBD 9 pin connector) towards Local Craft
Terminal
QECC interface for remote management through DCC channels.

2.4.4.8 Additional Housekeeping unit
This optional unit (equipped as depicted in Fig. 4. on page 48) increases by 18 the number of
Housekeeping inputs available.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2.4.4.9 Power Supply

PSU units are grouped in 2units groups (i.e. PSU0+PSU1, PSU2+PSU3, ...). Each PSU pair
converts and then distributes, through the backpanel, power supply to the correspondent pair of
RRA, whereas each PSU board supplies only the associated MODEM board (i.e. PSU0 supplies only
MODEM0 board, etc.) If not utilized, the P.S. slots are provided with a front plate cover.
Each P.S. gets the primary voltage from both batteries, connected in parallel.
The P. S. units supply the secondary power voltage to all the units starting from the primary voltage:
48 to 60 Vdc ( 20%);
The system can also be powered by batteries with different voltage: 24 Vdc ( 20%). In this case,
onpurpose designed DC/DC converters are available and have to be installed in the lower area
of the rack.
2.4.4.10 Battery filter
Two battery filters, located in the lower side positions of the subrack, supply the DC power to the
common units (System Controller, Service) in 1+1 protected way.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
57 / 514
2.4.5 ADM 1650SMC
When the Wireless Multi Service Node functionality is requested, an additional 1650SMC ADM has to
be installed in the upper position of the LSY rack, just above the baseband regenerator subrack .
WMSN provide the mapping functionality (STM1 frame creation), synchronization management and
tributary adddrop, network protection and VCs crossconnection.
Fig. 11. WMSN terminal rack equipped with 1650SMC ADM

2.4.5.2 ADM 1650SMC mechanical assembly
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A detailed view of the 1650SMC adddrop multiplexer is shown in Fig. 12.
Fig. 12. 1650SMC add drop multiplexer
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
58 / 514

2.4.5.1 WMSN rack configuration
2.4.5.3 WMSN block diagram

In Fig. 13. , the block diagram of the MST functionality, relevant to a single channel, is shown.
Fig. 13. MST single channel functional block diagram

This configuration, in particular, gives the possibility to manage up to 8 STM1 channels lineside and to
transmit them radio side with or without radio protection, in the following configurations:
Up to 7+1 or 8+0 configuration in one direction (OS). The obtained functionality is the one
corresponding to a Line Terminal (LT).
Up to 4+0 or 4+1 configuration in two different directions (TS). The terminal is configured as a
Wireless Add Drop Multiplexer .
The 1650SMC equipment consist of the following subsystem units:
Compact ADM
Access module
Auxiliary and overhead
Power supply
The Compact ADM is built upon a matrix that can accept, through an access module providing the physical
interface for the asynchronous or synchronous signals, a maximum of 63x2 Mb/s, 3x34 Mb/s, 3x45 Mb/s,
140 Mb/s or 155 Mb/s streams.
Inside the ADM, a synchronization unit provides the timing reference needed by all the components of the
network element, with a max. daily drift of 0.37 ppm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A control subsystem realizes the Synchronous System Management Function (SEMF), according with
ITUT G.783 recommendation. The subsystem operates with a double controlling system utilizing an
Equipment Controller (EC) for DCC networking and a Shelf Controller (SC) for alarm detection and
reporting, performance monitoring and equipment protection switching.
A wide range of auxiliary service channels is offered according to SDH standards utilizing SDH and POH
bytes. These bytes are used for alignment word, parity check, network management operations,
performance monitoring; some data and orderwire channels are available to the user.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
59 / 514
Two batteries can be used at the input, with automatic selection on the one with higher voltage.
The distribution is protected against single converter failure.
This handbook gives no detailed information on 1650SMC equipment. For this purpose,
please refer to 1650SMC specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.2 on page 471) with the
following exception:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In the application for 9600LSY, the FAN SHELF used for 1650SMC is not
that described in the 1650SMC documentation, but that described in this
handbook.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
60 / 514

The unit utilizes a power supply distributed architecture where the 48/60 V battery voltage is distributed
to all the cards and here is DC/DC converted to the voltages necessary to each card.

2.4.6 FANS Subrack

The usage of the fan unit inside the rack is mandatory to respect Safety international standards and the
utilization is compulsory in all the system configurations, either in regenerator and WMSN case.
The FANS subrack is developed to be used both in regenerator and in WMSN configurations. In the first
case it is installed only between the baseband subrack and the transceiver assembly, just above the
receiving branching.
In the second case a second fan subrack is moreover installed in the higher part of the rack, just under
the 1650 MC unit.
The subrack, 600mm wide and 50 mm high, can contain one or two subunits with 4 fans each as shown
in the Fig. 14. herebelow.
SUBUNIT A
SUBUNIT B
Fig. 14. FANS Subrack

As a general rule, a subunit must be equipped when there are boards over their ventilation area.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Further information on equipping rules are given in para.3.9 on page 169.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
61 / 514
a)
b)
Internal connections
Four different connection kits have been designed to cover all the needed system configurations:
Common kit
This cable kit is utilized in all the configurations in quantity 1. It includes the cables for :
Can bus
Unit presence
Rack lamps
Battery cables
Channel dedicated kit

It includes all the connections among the units relevant to each single channel.
It has to be foreseen with quantity equal to the total number of radio channels present in the
terminal, including the spare channel.
Two different codes are present in this category: one for channels without space diversity, a
second one for channels with space diversity.
Optional kit for reused channels

It includes the cables needed for the frequency reuse operation. They are the IF cables and
RF cables for the synchronization of the Rx local oscillators. One kit is used for one couple of
reused channels.
Two different codes are envisaged: one kit foresee short length cable needed for reused
channels connection inside the same rack.
The second must be used when the interconnections are relevant to two different racks.
Interconnection cables to 1650SMC

Three dedicated cable kits have been developed for the interconnection from the radio
regenerator to the 1650SMC unit:
Common part cable kit (including rack lamp cable)
1+1/2+0 basic cable kit (signal cables)
1 cable kit for one extension channel (signal cables, one for each added channel besides
1+1/2+0))
External connections
Main signal interfaces of the terminal are present on the front panel of each RRA unit.
Alarm interconnections are directly present in the access area of baseband subrack and no
distributor board is foreseen neither in baseband nor in TRU subrack.
2.4.8 Installation materials
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This handbook gives no detailed information on Installation materials, as well as on Installation

procedures and Commissioning procedures and related Acceptance Test documents. For this
purpose, please refer to specific documents REF. [E] and [F] on page 469.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
62 / 514

2.4.7 System wiring

2.5 Configurations
2.5.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes in detail the different configurations of 9600LSY family taking into account the
various peculiar aspects, and comprehends the following main paragraphs:
Station configurations
Radio channel configurations
System configuration for network solutions
Branching configurations
As far as Fan subrack configurations are concerned, refer to para.2.4.6 on page 61.
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this paragraph are:
para.2.3 on page 47
para.2.4 on page 51

Hardware components
2.5.2 Station configurations

The 9600LSY family allows the radio transmission of both STM1 and STM0 utilizing protected and
unprotected heterofrequency configurations N+0, N+1 or 2x (N+1) CCDP type.
Several types of configurations are available, allowing to address different network applications .
Referred to the maximum rack implementation, the list shows the widest allowed configurations:
7+1
8+0
7+1
8+0
2x(7+1)
Terminal WMSN
Terminal WMSN
Terminal regenerator or WMSN CCDP
in 1 ETSI rack
in 1 ETSI rack
in 1 ETSI rack
in 1 ETSI rack
in 2 ETSI racks
The complete list of the possible configurations foreseen for the 9600LSY family is hereafter indicated,
subdivided in several blocks:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
a)
Regenerator configuration utilizing copolar branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 1+1

9600LSY REG. 2+1
9600LSY REG. 3+1
9600LSY REG. 4+1
9600LSY REG. 5+1
9600LSY REG. 6+1
9600LSY REG. 7+1
9600LSY REG. 2+0
9600LSY REG. 3+0
9600LSY REG. 4+0
9600LSY REG. 5+0
9600LSY REG. 6+0
9600LSY REG. 7+0
9600LSY REG. 8+0
ED
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
1 RACK
1 NETWORK ELEMENT
1 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNEL
(only in N+1)
1 POLARIZATION PER RACK
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
63 / 514
Regenerator configuration utilizing alternatepolar branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 1+1

9600LSY REG. 2+1
9600LSY REG. 3+1
9600LSY REG. 4+1
9600LSY REG. 5+1
9600LSY REG. 6+1
9600LSY REG. 7+1
9600LSY REG. 2+0
9600LSY REG. 3+0
9600LSY REG. 4+0
9600LSY REG. 5+0
9600LSY REG. 6+0
9600LSY REG. 7+0
9600LSY REG. 8+0
c)
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
Regenerator configuration utilizing single protection channel, installed into a single rack and
with alternatepolar branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 1+1 FREQUENCY REUSE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
d)
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1 RACK
1 NETWORK ELEMENT
1 PROTECTION CHANNEL
4 CHANNELS MAX ON
H POLARIZATION
4 CHANNELS MAX ON
V POLARIZATION
4 DIFFERENT
FREQUENCIES MAX
8 CHANNELS MAX
Regenerator configuration utilizing double protection, installed into two racks and copolar
branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 2x(1+1)

9600LSY REG. 2x(2+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(3+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(4+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(5+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(6+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(7+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(2+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(3+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(4+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(5+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(6+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(7+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(8+0)
ED
1 RACK
1 NETWORK ELEMENT
1 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNEL
(only in N+1)
4 CHANNELS MAX ON H POLARIZATION
4 CHANNELS MAX ON V POLARIZATION
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
2 RACKS
2 NETWORK ELEMENTS
2 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNELS
(only in N+1)
SECOND RACK ONLY FOR REUSED
CHANNELS
1 POLARIZATION PER RACK
8 CHANNELS MAX PER EACH RACK
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
64 / 514

b)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

e)
Regenerator configuration utilizing double protection, installed into two racks and
alternatepolar branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 2x(1+1)

9600LSY REG. 2x(2+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(3+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(4+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(5+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(6+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(7+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(2+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(3+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(4+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(5+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(6+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(7+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(8+0)
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
2 RACKS
2 NETWORK ELEMENTS
2 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNELs
(only in N+1)
SECOND RACK ONLY FOR REUSED
CHANNELS
2 POLARIZATIONS PER RACK
4 CHANNELS MAX ON H POLARIZATION
PER EACH RACK
4 CHANNELS MAX ON V POLARIZATION
PER EACH RACK
NOTE:
The rack and the subracks have been designed to host up to 10 channels, even if the normal maximum
configuration is limited to 8 channels. In fact, the expansion of the systems without traffic interruption is
available only for this last maximum configuration.
However, it could be possible , for particular customer requirements or utilizing some channel plans, to
foresee even the possibility to get 10 channels per rack.
A terminal can be configured as a WMSN simply adding a 1650SMC device to the radio regenerator
equipment .
Each configuration is easily expansible to higher capacities just adding the foreseen expansion kits.
In Fig. 15. and Fig. 15. , a view of a 8 channel regenerator terminal and 8 channel WMSN are respectively
shown
Fig. 15. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 regenerator

configuration
ED
Fig. 16. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0
WMSN
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
65 / 514
STM1
STM1
STM1
STM1
STM1
STM1
USER
INT/RST
USER
INT/RST
USER
INT/RST
USER
INT/RST
USER
INT/RST
USER
INT/RST
USER
INT/RST
RADIO PROTECTION SWITCHING
STM1
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER

In the next Fig. 17. , the block diagram of a 7+1 regenerator is shown.
Fig. 17. 9600LSY 7+1 Regenerator configuration
REGENERATOR
OMSN
TRAF.PORT
AGGREG.
RST
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
TRAF.PORT
AGGREG.
RST
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
TRAF.PORT
AGGREG.
RST
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
TRAF.PORT
AGGREG.
RST
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
TRAF.PORT
AGGREG.
RST
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
TRAF.PORT
AGGREG.
RST
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
TRAF.PORT
AGGREG.
RST
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
RADIO PROTECTION
SWITCHING
7X STM1or 140 or 3x45 or 3x34or 63x2 Mb/s
Next Fig. 18. shows a block diagram illustrating a Wireless Multiservice Node for 7 x STM1 channels
transmitted in only one direction (OS) and configured with radio protection implementing a 7+1 radio
configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 18. 9600LSY WMSNOS 7x STM1 configuration with radio protection for 7+1 STM1
transmission.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
66 / 514

In the next Fig. 19. a Wireless Multiservice Node (eastwest) two sides configuration (WMSNTS) with
four STM1 streams for each direction is presented with possibility to drop/insert each STM1 signal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 19. 9600LSY WMSN Two Sides configuration
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
67 / 514
2.5.3 Radio channel configurations
The following Fig. 20. shows the configurations supported according to the frequency arrangement.
.....
V (H)
.....
H (V)
Alternate channel dualpolarized, up to (7+1) / (8+0)

(ACDP operation)
.....
V (H)
.....
H (V)
Cochannel dualpolarized, up to (7+1) / (8+0)

(CCDP operation)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 20. Channel arrangement
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
68 / 514

Channel arrangement
Frequency Channel assignment according to station layouts

In the following the possible station layouts will be analyzed with the relevant evolutions.
Fig. 21. shows an example of basic configurations from which the possible evolutions are depicted in
following Fig. 22. thru Fig. 26.
channels
1357
BB
A)
O n e p o la r p e r r a c k
(3 + 1)
channels
1234
1 2 3 4
B)
BB
One polar per rack

(3 + 1)
channels
13
13
REUSED
C)T w o
p o l a r p e r rack
(3 + 1 )
BB
f r e q. R e u s e
REUSED
channels
12
REUSED
12
1 2
D)
Two polar per rack

( 3 +1)
BB
f r e q. R e u s e
channels
13
24
BB
1
2
E )Two
4
polar per rack
(3 + 1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 21. 3+1 terminal basic station layouts
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
69 / 514

Fig. 22. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case A) of previous
Fig. 21. on page 69.
channels
1357 1357
channels
1357
reused
BB
BB
One polar per rack
channels
1357 1357
2468
channels
2468 2468
reused
reused
BB
T w o p o l a r p e r rack 2* (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k (7+1 )
channels
1357 2468
BB
T w o p o l a r p e r rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
3+1
BB
channels
1357
channels
1357 2468
reused
BB
BB
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k 2 * (7+1 ) f r e q. R e u s e
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 22. Terminal station layout: extension starting from A) basic layout
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
70 / 514

Fig. 23. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case B) of previous
channels
channels
1234
12345678
BB
BB
One polar per rack
3+1
channels
12345678
channels
12345678
reused
reused
BB
channels
1234 1234
O n e p o l a r p e r rack 2 x (7+1) Freq.Reuse
channels
5678 5678
reused
reused
BB
BB
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k (7+1) F r e q. R e u s e
BB
BB
O n e p o l a r p e rr a c k (7+1)
channels
1234 1234
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k 2 * (7+1) f r e q. R e u s e
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 23. Terminal station layout: extension starting from B) basic layout
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
71 / 514

Fig. 24. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case C) of previous
channels
channels
13
1324
13
1324
reused
reused
BB
BB
Two polar per rack (3+1) Freq.Reuse
channels
1357
channels
1357
1324
channels
1357
1357
Two polar per rack 2* (8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels
2468
2468
reused
reused
BB
BB
5
7
Two polar per rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
BB
5768
reused
BB
BB
5768
reused
reused
channels
1324
Two polar per rack 2* (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 24. Terminal station layout: extension starting from C) basic layout
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
72 / 514

Fig. 25. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case D) of previous
channels
channels
12
1234
1234
12
reused
reused
BB
BB
3
channels
5678 5678
channels
1234 1234
reused
reused
BB
BB
5
7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 25. Terminal station layout: extension starting from D) basic layout
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
73 / 514

Fig. 26. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case E) of previous
channels
channels
13
1324
2413
reused
24
BB
BB
Two polar per rack (3+1)
channels
1357
channels
1324 2413
2468
channels
5768 6857
reused
reused
BB
BB
Two polar per rack (7+1)
channels
1357
BB
channels
1357 2468
2468
reused reused
BB
BB
Two polar per rack 2* (7+1) Freq.Reuse
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 26. Terminal station layout: extension starting from E) basic layout
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
74 / 514

Fig. 27. shows an example of 4+0/4+1 EAST/WEST terminal basic configurations.

channels
135
135
24
24
1
2
BB
channels
135
135
13
13
T w o p o la r e a s tw e s t p e r r a c k
2*(4 + 1)
reused
reused
A)
B)
T w o p o la r e a s tw e s t p e r r a c k
2*(4 + 1) f r e q. R e u s e
BB
channels
123
123
12
12
reused
reused
1 2 3
C) T w o
p o la r e a s tw e s t p e r r a c k
2*(4 + 1) f r e q. R e u s e
BB
channels
12345
12345
1 2 3 4 5
D) O n e
p o l a r e a s tw e s t p e r r a c k
2*(4 +1)
BB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 27. 4+0/4+1 EAST/WEST terminal basic station layouts
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
75 / 514
Besides the radio configurations presented previously, the 9600LSY family supplies an answer to various
transmission problems supplying particular functional solutions.
The purpose of this paragraph is to describe these functionalities giving some simple system block
diagrams and/or short comments.
Space Diversity
All the available configurations in all the frequency bands of 9600LSY family may include the Space
Diversity protection. This feature is obtained adding to the system a second receiver connected,
through a dedicated branching, to the Space diversity second antenna.
This second receiver, exactly equal to the main one, is installed inside the transceiver unit, in the
dedicated area just aside the main one.
The two IF signals (coming from the main and diversity receivers) are sent to the modem, where are
processed by two demodulators and summed by a new designed baseband combiner.
To achieve this function, one plugin IF module with A/D converters must be added to the modem
unit.
Expansion procedure
9600LSY is a fully expansible radio system. It means that, starting from the minimum 1+1 / 2+0
configuration, it is possible to increase the traffic capacity adding to the station the units necessary
to increase the number of radio channels up to the maximum allowed by the configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The expansion procedure is reported in para.3.5.2 on page 131.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
76 / 514

2.5.4 System configuration for network solutions

2.5.5 Branching configurations

The branching for N+0 or N+1 configurations is realized in two different ways to be connected to a single
or double polarized antenna (1 or 2 polarizations per rack versions) and can manage up to 8 RF channels.
In both cases, Tx and Rx filters and channel circulators are accommodated in two horizontal lines
respectively at the bottom side and at the upper side of the transceiver subrack.
They are connected to the antenna circulators sited over the top of the rack by means of branching
connections installed along one or both rack side walls.
Depending on the frequency band, the branching is realized utilizing coaxial connection (4 and 5 GHz
bands) or using waveguides (from 6 GHz to 13 GHz).
The branchings connected to the space diversity receiver (this function is foreseen in all the bands and
for all the configurations) follow the technological choice utilized for the main branching.
The utilization of narrow band RF branching filters allows to avoid the use of 3 dB hybrids ( 3dB couplers
previously used for CCDP application) in all the frequency plans and for all the frequency spacings
including 28 MHz.
In all configurations, the connections among transceivers and relevant channeldepending branching
units are realized by vertical parallel coaxial cables without any cross connection.
This realization permits to simplify the installation operations (see Fig. 28. herebelow).
Rx Diversity branching
Rx branching
Coaxial interconnections
Branching V or H
Branching H or V
Tx branching
Channel circulator block + RF filter

Channel circulator block without RF filter
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 28. Schematic diagram of transceiver to branching connections
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
77 / 514
More and more often customers require to expand installed systems without causing traffic interruption.
Following this requirement, a particular branching solution has been developed.
This solution consists in having all the channel circulators needed for the maximum rack configuration
installed in advance, even if , at first, only a few of them are really utilized.
Dedicated codes including four circulators have been inserted in the catalogue. These blocks, one code
for each frequency band, are usable for all the terminal configurations. The unused circulator port that
will be connected to the filter branching in the future when expanding of the system, is closed by a short
circuit device. This device consents the signal to flow toward the antenna in transmission side or toward
the first active receiver in receiving side.
During the expansion operation, the short circuits devices are removed and the branching filters are
connected to the open circulator port, with easy and very short operation.
In such a way the traffic interruption can be minimized at minimum.
Taking in account that operating in TX side the expansion is performed adding the new channels as last
respect to the existing ones, this operation could be considered safe from the traffic interruption point of
view.
In Rx side the new channel are inserted between the antenna circulator and the first existing channels.
For this reason removing the short circuit device and leaving open the antenna port can lead to a lack of
signal to the following Rx channels until the new filter in installed.
Moreover, if in the receiving side the space diversity functionality is present, operating the expansion in
separated time on the main receiver branching and on the diversity receiver branching , the traffic
interruption can be completely avoid.
The circulators blocks are available in the bands from 6 to 13 GHz included.
At these frequences, the additional cost due to the presence of all the circulators even not utilized can
be supported by the systems, even in case of simple configurations.
At 4 and 5 GHz, on the contrary, the cost of the circulators is much heavier. For this reason the described
solution is not applied, and the traditional method (addition of the needed circulators at the moment of the
expansion) is still utilized.
Whatever is the number of working channels present in the rack, the number of the circulator blocks to
be used is 4 if the space diversity is not present, and 6 if it is implemented. This rule is valid both with
copolar and alternate polar branching solution.
Balanced branchings
The so called balanced branchings consents to get a constant attenuation of the branching for all the
channels relevant to the same terminal. So, also the system gain is constant whatever channel it is referred
to.
To get this performance the rule that has been followed is to insert the successive transmitters to the first
following the first and , on the contrary, to insert the added receiver before the existing ones.
The next figures give an exemplification of the balanced branching connections in the two cases of one
polarization per rack and two polarization per rack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Solution for branching in 6L band ( 9662LSY)

ITUR F. 383 channel plan foresees a frequency distance between the innermost channel of 44.49 MHz.
This narrow distance between channels 8 and 1 has obliged to insert, inside the branching in transmission
side, a dedicated wideband filter to avoid local interference between said channels that supplies an
additional filtering to the residual spectrum power generated by the transmitter 8 or 1 at the frequency
of the receiver 1 or 8 .
This filter is always installed in the branching, in all configurations (copolar and alternate polar) and in
independent way respect to the channels effectively installed in the link. It means that even if channels
8 and 1 are not utilized, the branching contains the filter. In such a way, we are free to install successively
the channels 8 and 1 for expansions of the link, without necessity to add the filter and , at last, without
causing traffic interruption.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
78 / 514

Branching extension without traffic interruption

One polarization per rack branching

In Fig. 29. herebelow, the branching version for 8 RF channels arranged in 1 polar per rack configuration
is shown. The picture include the space diversity optional branching.
MAIN
SP.DIV.
SP.DIV.Rx
MAIN Rx BRANCHING
RX
0
RX
1
RX
2
RX
3
RX
4
RX
5
RX
6
RX
7
TX
0
TX
1
TX
2
TX
3
TX
4
TX
5
TX
6
TX
7
Tx BRANCHING
Fig. 29. 1 polar per rack branching version for 8 RF channels
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The first slot on the left of the transceiver subrack is used for the spare transceiver (TR 0).
All the transceivers present in this configuration are connected to the single polarized branching and are
housed utilizing the slots in sequence starting from left side.
Please note the branching positions utilized for transmitter and receiver filters in the balanced branching
solutions.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
79 / 514
In Fig. 30. herebelow, the branching version for 8 RF channels arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration
is shown. The example here reported includes the space diversity option.
SP.DIV. ANTENNA
MAIN ANTENNA
SP.DIV. Rx
BRANCHING
MAIN Rx
BRANCHING
RX
0
RX
1
RX
2
RX
3
RX
6
RX
7
RX
8
RX
9
TX
0
TX
1
TX
2
TX
3
TX
6
TX
7
TX
8
TX
9
Tx BRANCHING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 30. Branching version for 8 RF channels, arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
80 / 514

Two polarizations per rack branching

In Fig. 31. herebelow, a 3+1 configuration, again with 2 polarization per rack, is reported, in this case
including the space diversity functionality.
Note that the expansion of the system is obtained progressively filling the transceiver subrack (and the
branching, as consequence) adding new units starting from the left and right external sides of the subrack.
Diversity Rx
Branching
Main Rx
branching
RX0
RX1
RX8
RX9
TX0
TX1
TX8
TX9
Tx branching
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 31. Branching version for 3+1 configuration with Space Diversity, arranged in 2 polar per rack
version
The first slot on the left of the transceiver subrack is reserved to the transceiver utilized for protection
(TR0).
It can work either on H or V polarization, depending on the RF channel utilized .
As a consequence, the branching installed in the left part of the rack can be connected either to the H
antenna polarization or the V one.
Once that the polarization (H or V) of the left side branching has been chosen, all the units that must be
connected to this antenna polarization will be installed on the left side and connected to this branching .
The others (connected to V or H polarization) will be installed and connected to the branching located on
the right side.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
81 / 514
2.6.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes in detail the Radio Transmission features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends
the following main paragraphs:
Frequency reuse technique (CCDP)

and XPIC Cross Polarization Canceller
Transmitted power control: static and ATPC
Loopbacks
para.2.3 on page 47
para.2.4 on page 51

Hardware components
2.6.2 Frequency reuse technique (CCDP) and XPIC Cross Polarization

Canceller
2.6.2.1 Introduction
Efficient bandwidth is a relevant issue in the digital radio application.
Multilevel signalling is a standard mean to get high spectral efficiency.
Unfortunately its sensitivity to channel impairments increases with the number of modulation levels. In
radio links carrying several channels, additional bandwidth saving is usually achieved by using both
horizontal and vertical polarization, with cross polarized adjacent channels to minimize interference.
A further improvement of transmission capacity can be obtained by the simultaneous use of the RF
channel for two independent digital transmissions on orthogonal polarization, which is commonly
addressed to as Crosspolarized cochannel frequency reuse technique.
Frequency reuse systems actually result in doubling the spectral efficiency of conventional transmissions.
However this is paid in terms of additional signal distortion, because of inevitable crosscoupling of dual
polarized channels. This is due both to propagation conditions (notably rain and ground reflections) and
imperfections in the antennae and waveguide feeders. The result of reduced cross polarization
discrimination (XPD) is cross polarization interference (XPI) , which sums up with intersymbol
interference generated by channel dispersions and give rise to potentially serious impairments in
detection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
XPI and intersymbol interference can be jointly contrasted by resorting to adaptive processing techniques.
Baseband equalizations together with cross polarization interference canceller (XPIC) allow signal
distortion to be kept within tolerable limits, thus making frequency reuse a viable option.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
82 / 514

2.6 Radio Transmission features

2.6.2.2 XPIC Operating principle and receiver architecture

The idea behind the XPIC operation is that of adjusting the amplitude and phase of the received signal
samples of the opposite polarization, so as to provide an estimate of the XPI corrupting the desired copol
signal. This estimate can then be subtracted from the main signal, producing crosspol interference
cancellation. Taking into account the timevarying nature of the channel, the XPIC operation must be
adaptively adjusted according to a proper rule to track the variation in both copolar and crosspolar
channels parameters.
To counteract both XPI and multipath fading, the joint use of XPIC and adaptive equalization is advised.
Following this approach, the adopted crosspol cofrequency receiver structure results in an arrangement
of four adaptive bandspaced transverse filters, as show in Fig. 32.
H pol.
received signal
EQUALIZER
H data
XPIC
H error signal
V error signal
XPIC
V pol.
received signal
V data
EQUALIZER
Fig. 32. XPIC operating principle

In the same figure the XPIC updating criterion is also addressed. The XPIC tapweights are adjusted so
as to minimize the correlation between crosspol received signal and copol error signal.
This operation minimizes the correlation between error signal and cross polarization interference.
A fundamental issue in a frequency reuse system design is the receiver recover capability. As a matter
of fact, deep fading occurrences, which can produce a system loss of lock, are usually of short duration,
so that also moderate hysteresis effects on system lockin can severely increase the total outage time (C/I
typical values 2 5 dB).
Therefore, care must be taken in the choice of the receiver synchronization strategies, in order to avoid
any interaction between dualpol sections of receiver during the recovery process.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The adopted frequency reuse system architecture is sketched in Fig. 33. on page 84.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
83 / 514
H IF
RX
H
DOWN
CONV
DEM
+
XPIC
IF
H
DATA
UP
MOD
DATA
CONV
TX
master
LO
synchr.
.
LO
MOD
DATA
UP
CONV
slave
TX
RX
DOWN
CONV
DEM
+
XPIC
IF
V
DATA
LO
V IF
Fig. 33. Frequency reuse system architecture

The only design constraint is that a common RF local oscillator is used for both dualpol signals, while
two independent decision directed carrier recovery loops are employed for the demodulation from IF to
baseband for each equalizer canceller pair input signals.
This approach preserves the precise phase and frequency relationship between the received signal and
the crosspol signal used for XPI cancellation.
And this is true even when the carrier associated with the received signal is out of lock. Such coherence
has very important implications because without cancellation, when the terminal is out of lock, XPI
distortion will be so severe that the terminal will not easily regain lock.
Another advantage of such an arrangement is that no constraints are imposed on Tx oscillators. In
addition, a joint recovery process of crosspol carriers is avoided.
The equalizer/canceller system operation is based on dualpol received signal samples. Therefore, a
critical point of receiver design is to devise the proper signal sampling strategy. We chose to employ a
separate symbol synchronizer for each crosspol branch of the receiver. As indicated in Fig. 33. , the
same clock is used to sample the input signal of an equalizer and of the associated XPI canceller. This
makes the XPIC operation independent of the synchronization of dual polarized transmitted data streams.
It is of great importance to observe that the above synchronization strategies result in a complete
independence of operation of the receiver branches on opposite polarization. This allows operation even
when the receiving digital terminal on the opposite polarization is out of service.
2.6.2.3 XPIF Factor
The receiver performance can be assessed in term of the XPI rejection capability of the canceller. This
is quantified by the crosspolarization improvement factor (XPIF), which is the difference of the carrier
to XPI ratio (C/XPIs) corresponding to a predefined error performance in a dual polarized system with and
without XPIC, respectively.
Typical values (optimum phase) for a 128 MLC system is 22 dB.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2.6.2.4 XPIC Card

The XPIC card is a daughter board that has to be inserted in both modem units of the main and reused
channel of each bearer that is reused. This unit is installed in the system only if the reuse of frequency is
implemented. It can be also added to the modem in second step if a expansion of the system utilizing the
reuse of a frequency is required after the first installation.
The unit has a second utilization, again as daughter board, as baseband combiner when the space
diversity functionality is implemented in the link.
In case of both functionality presence (XPIC and Space diversity), two units are necessary and both must
be installed inside the modems.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
84 / 514

LO

2.6.2.5 Rack configurations for frequency reuse

Frequency reuse technique allows to double the transmission capacity of each radio channel; a certain
number of channels is then transmitted at the same frequency of the main one on the second antenna
polarization.
We can envisage two main different topologies of reused systems: with one spare channel and with two
spare channels.
a)
Reused systems with a single protection channel

Terminals with a single protection channel are installed in only one rack .
The maximum number of channels is 8 and up to 4 different frequencies can be utilized.
Each terminal is identified in the network as a single N.E.. Higher configurations are not allowed.
Fig. 34. hereafter reported shows an example of a reused terminal .
In the example all the channels are reused and the spare channel, transmitted by the first transceiver
installed on the left side of the shelf, is channel 1H. The configuration obviously utilizes double
antenna polarization.
TRU
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND
SHELF)
Rx
BRANCHING
CROSSCORRESPONDENCE
OF HV CHANNELS
CHANNELS
1 2 3 4
HHHH
4 3 2 1
VVVV
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tx
BRANCHING
Fig. 34. 7+1 reused terminal with single protection (ch. 1H)
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
85 / 514
Reused systems with two protection channels

Two protection channels are available when a complete 2x(n+1) system is installed in two racks. In
this case there will be two n+1 systems , one for each rack, using n+1 frequencies. One spare channel
for each rack is present. Maximum number of channels for each polarization is 8 (including the spare
channel).
A terminal, configured as above, always consists of two independent Network Elements, one for each
rack.
Two different solutions are available: each rack can be configured with alternate polarization and with
only one polarization.
If the tworack system is foreseen since the beginning, a solution with only one polarization per rack
is recommended. In case of future expansion, in fact, there is no necessity to connect the branchings
of the two racks, avoiding heavy mounting operations and long traffic interruptions.
However, the with 2PPR solution is also available.
Obviously if an 1PPR or 2PPR existing system has to be expanded with reused channels utilizing
the second rack, the AP or CP solution, already adopted in the installed system has to be foreseen
also in the second rack.
In Fig. 35. below, a 7+1 reused terminal with double spare channels, with the 2 polar per rack
recommended solution, is shown.
RACK 1
RACK 0
CROSSCORRESPONDENCE
OF HV CHANNELS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CHANNELS
TRU
TRU
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND
SHELF)
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND
SHELF)
Rx
BRANCHING
Rx
BRANCHING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HHHHHHHH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
VVVVVVVV
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tx
BRANCHING
Tx
BRANCHING
Fig. 35. 2 x (7+1) reused terminal with double protection (on ch. 1H and 1V) in 1PPR solution
In the figure, two other slots are available in each rack for future expansion.
The shown terminal layout foresees the side to side rack position, but the back to back solution
is also possible.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
86 / 514

b)
c)
Expansion of a single protection reused system to double protection

Fig. 36. herebelow shows the expansion of a single protection reused terminal to a higher
configuration. Taking into account the limitation concerning the maximum allowed configuration in
case of single protectionsingle rack terminal (7 working channels and 4 different frequencies), the
expansion utilizes a second rack .
In this case the system is modified into a double protection one. The second spare channel is housed
in the second rack (in the shown case on ch. 2H) .
The rack utilized for the expansion utilizes the 2PPR configuration used by the first rack.
This solution consents to expand a single rack double polarized terminal up to 7+1/8+0 reused
configuration. The new added rack will be identified as a second network element .
CROSSCORRESPONDENCE
OF HV CHANNELS
CHANNELS
TRU
TRU
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND
SHELF)
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND
SHELF)
Rx
BRANCHING
Rx
BRANCHING
1 3 5 7
HHHH
7 5 3 1
VVVV
2 4 6 8
HHHH
8 6 4 2
VVVV
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tx
BRANCHING
Tx
BRANCHING
RACK 1
RACK 0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 36. Expansion from 7+1 single protection to 2 x (7+1) reused terminal
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
87 / 514
The specific connections needed for the terminals equipped for the frequency reuse technique are
hereafter described:
Local Oscillator Synchronization

The two local oscillators connected to the two RF receivers (main and reused) working on each
reused frequency must be together synchronized. This function is obtained by a phase lock loop
system utilizing a 2 GHz reference signal transferred from the L.O. of the main receiver ( master
local oscillator) to the L.O. of the reused receiver (slave local oscillator). This connection is
performed by means of a coaxial cable between oscillators and a Frequency Reuse Kit (a special
module and associated cabling) inside the Master Oscillator. In case of failure of the main local
oscillator or lack of the synchronization signal due to whatever cause , the slave Rx L.O. of the reused
channel utilizes its own RF signal , obviously unlocked to the main LO, to feed the Rx down converter
and to maintain in service the reused channel.
In case of failure of the master LO, The slave one can assume the master functionality and to be
utilized as source of the reference signal to be used to feed the signal to the frequency multiplier
contained in the main LO and allowing the protection of the master LO .
Fig. 37. herebelow shows how the mutual protection between the two LOs can be obtained.
MASTER LO
SLAVE LO
2GHz
oscillator
2GHz
oscillator
FR
module
Synch. signal coaxial cable
XN
XN
multiplier
multiplier
RF OUT
RF OUT
Fig. 37. Main / slave LO mutual protection

If main and reused channels are located in different racks , cable interconnections between the two
racks are needed . The maximum loss acceptable is 10 dB and the cable length is y 7 m .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
I.F. interconnection cables

The XPIC unit, to perform the interference cancellation, must receive the IF signal from both main
and reused receiver. For this reason, in addition to the standard cables (used in a nonreused
systems), a IF cable for each XPIC unit must be utilized to connect the main receiver to the
demodulator of the reused system and vice versa.
Two dedicated cable kits, including both the LO and IF connections, are foreseen. They are available
with different cable lengths depending on the connection necessity (inside the same rack or between
the two racks). Only one kit is needed for a couple of reused channels.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
88 / 514

2.6.2.6 Interconnections in reused systems
RF branching interconnection

In case of single polarized rack used in two racks terminal, no branching interconnections are needed
between the racks, each of them being connected directly and independently to one antenna port.
On the contrary, in case of usage of alternate polarization on both racks, the transceivers utilizing the
same antenna polarization must be connected to the same branching. It means that the some
waveguides or cables (depending on the frequency band) will connect the two racks to send to the
two antenna polarization all the H and all the V channels. Following Fig. 38. shows how this is carried
out.
RX BRANCHING
RX BRANCHING
TX BRANCHING
TX BRANCHING
RACK 0
RACK 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 38. Branching interconnections

All the branching configurations do not include passive hybrids. Their utilization has been avoided
thanks to the use of narrow channel filters that allows to transmit channels down to a minimum
distance of 28 MHz on the same branching .
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
89 / 514
The product allows two ways to adjust the transmitted power: the first one in a static way, the second one
under automatic control loop (ATPC function).
2.6.3.1 Transmit power static adjustment
The capability to adjust transmitted power in a static and fixed way has been introduced for those countries
where, due to internal rules, the ATPC function is not accepted or for those hops in which, due the short
length and interface problems, a fixed reduced transmitted power is preferred.
The range of the possible attenuation depends on the frequency band involved and is detailed in chapter
Technical Specifications.
The step for adjustment is 1 dB, with an accuracy of 0.5 dB. The setting of the transmitted power can
be performed locally by means of ECT.
2.6.3.2 ATPC function
The automatic control of the transmitted power (ATPC) function allows to regulate the transmitted power
in order to supply a reduced power in situation of normal propagation and the maximum power in
conditions of fading.
In synchronous radio link systems, the ATPC device is considered a very important function taking into
account the following advantages:
reduction of the internal interferences of the radio system and with other systems
reduction of the average consumption of the transmitter considering that the maximum power is
supplied for small percentages of time
improvement of the averages conditions of the transmitter about the linearity and consequent
reduction of phenomena of background error due to non linear distortion that with ATPC could be
revealed only in conditions of fading
possibility to increase the System Gain as a consequence to the reduction of the Backoff on the
power transmitted taking into account what above mentioned
substitution of a possible microwaves attenuator to realize different range of power.
As far as concern the values relative to the operating range of the ATPC, refer to chapter Technical
Specifications.
ATPC working principle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The ATPC system is based on a control loop of the power transmitted between a TX transmitter and a RX
receiver connected in a radio link.
With reference to Fig. 39. on page 91, the receiver furnishes through the AGC voltage the information of
the received power to the ATPC controller; it compares the voltage with threshold values (presettable) and
according to the obtained result send through to the ATPC controller on the remote station of the link the
orders of increase/ decrease of transmitted power. These orders are processed and therefore transferred
to the associated transmitter.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
90 / 514

2.6.3 Transmitted power control: static and ATPC
STATION B
STATION A
PRX
RX
IF
IF
MOD
DEM
VATPC
COMATPC
ATPC
CONTROL
AGC
RFCOH
INSERT
RFCOH
EXTRACT
PRX ATPC
RX FAILURE
ATPC DATA
ATPC DATA
DEM
N.B.
IF
RX
PTX
PRX
TX
IF
MOD
ATPC regulation shown in one direction of transmission only and valid for each channel
Fig. 39. ATPC Functionality
The information of control of the transmitted power is exchanged between the two stations of a link utilizing
service channel at 64 Kbit/s inserted in RFCOH bytes (avoiding to touch standard SOH bytes).
In the protected configurations these information are transmitted 1+1 protected.
The information regarding the ATPC functionality can be resumed in the following (for each channel):
received power (absolute digital value to be transmitted towards the remote station in order to move
the Tx output power).
Rx failure (for remote Tx inhibition with reused system configuration)
ID_channel + ID_direction (for identification of ATPC channel in order to avoid problems in case of
crosstalk/interference or in case of 1+0 eastwest configuration release 2.0)
These information are organized in registers of SPRI (Serial Peripheral Register Interface) where the PRx
and ID_ch information are transmitted with higher priority than Rx fail.
The information for each channel received in remote station is sent to the relevant transmitter where the
PRx information received is compared to the thresholds set and it is decided to send up or down or hold
commands to the RF transmitter.
The Rx failure received in the Tx remote station is used to switch off the relevant transmitter in case of
frequency reuse or to set the Tx at low Pout in case of standard configuration (no frequency reuse
application).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The service channel above mentioned is a point to point type and in the SDH systems is terminated in each
RRA/Modemodulator.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
91 / 514
The ATPC control system is replied for each channel without any centralized function.
The system control is organized in two parts for each channel and for each direction:
the Rx system control implementing PRx detection, eventual Rx failure detection and insertion of the
above data in RFCOH bytes
the Tx system control implementing extraction of data from RFCOH bytes and PTx drive.
ATPC Threshold management
The transmitter is able to change the output power in the range MAX TL (max level) and MIN TL (min level).
The transceiver has an its own default value for MAX TL, MIN TL and NOM TL (nominal level).
It is possible to set the following values:
A MAX TL
(max level ATPC)
where
A MAX TL x MAX TL
A MIN TL
(min level ATPC)
where
A MIN TL y MIN TL
with the constrain:

MIN TL x A MIN TL x NOM TL
A MIN TL x A MAX TL x MAX TL
The extreme thresholds MAX TL and MIN TL are reported in the data sheet (see par. 3.3.2)
It means that:
the ATPC range is not fixed but variable according to the values set for A MAX TL and A MIN TL
the max ATPC output power can be different from the max output power of the transmitter and the
ATPC functionality can be maintained with reduced range
The receiver has an its own default value (not changeable) for a receive power threshold called EXTRA
POWER threshold depending on the signal (STM1 or STM0) corresponding to guaranteed threshold
10E6.
On the receiver it is possible to set a received power Low threshold for loop activation within the following
limits:
LOW threshold: in the range from 40 dBm to EXTRA POWER threshold dBm
When the received signal decreases and overcomes the LOW threshold the transmitter increases the
output power up to the nominal value. Only if the received signal overcomes the EXTRA POWER threshold
the transmitter increases the output power reducing its backoff (if LMA>LN only). The hysteresis for both
thresholds is 3dB.
The PRx value sent to the transmitter is refreshed with 10ms time interval.
In case of loss of Tx_Rx ATPC signal, exchanged between Tx and Rx, the output power is frozen and an
ATPC loop alarm must be activated (no other actions are taken); when the communication is restored the
ATPC loop alarm is disactivated after an hysteresis to be defined.
It is possible to enable or to disable ATPC function: when ATPC is disabled the output power can be driven
normally according to 3.3.2.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Every power change, from manual to automatic and viceversa is performed at the speed of 1dB /10ms.
To be sure that a decreasing of Rx power of one receiver corresponds to a PTx increasing of the relevant
Tx in remote station an identifier station code must be used. The same identifier station code should
be set on the two station involved in the ATPC functionality avoiding that in crosstalk/interference or
RFCOH bypass in repeater the Tx in one station can be driven by a not relevant Rx.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
92 / 514

Organization of the control system
2.6.4 Loopbacks

The loopback function makes fault location and maintenance tests fast and simple.
In 9600LSY, the following loopbacks can be performed:
Line loopback (RRA)

A Line Loopback is a loopback where the incoming signal to a physical port is looped back onto
the outgoing signal (see Fig. 40. )
Internal loopback (RRA RFCOH)

An Internal Loopback is a loopback where the internal outgoing signal of a port is looped back
onto its internal incoming signal (see Fig. 41. and Fig. 42. )
RST
SPI
RPS
RST
RFCOH
MODEM
RT
RSPI
RRA
MD
TRI
Fig. 40. Loopback A: RRA line loopback
RST
SPI
RST
RPS
RFCOH
MODEM
RT
RSPI
RRA
MD
TRI
Fig. 41. Loopback B: RRA internal loopback
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
MODEM
RFCOH
RT
RSPI
RSPI
RRA
MD
TRI
Fig. 42. Loopback C: RFCOH Internal loopback
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
All of these are loop and continue loopbacks (the signal is sent back and continues its path).
the residual BER values (RBER) are not guaranteed in Radio Local Loop condition on.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
93 / 514
2.6.4.1 Caution: channel lockout
channel lockout on channel loopback on measures

This avoids that possible arising alarms can activate protections. To exit from this conditions, thus leading
system back to normal operating conditions, perform reverse command sequence:
end of measures channel loopback off channel lockout off
Channel lockout on/off and loopback on/off are performed by Craft Terminal (see Operators Handbook
for details).
2.6.4.2 Caution: recoverable and unrecoverable loopbacks (with RECT)
A LHR Network Element can be controlled, besides by the local Craft Terminal (ECT), by a Remote Craft
Terminal (RECT). In certain conditions, that are explained here, loopbacks setup by RECT are not
recoverable by RECT, therefore their settingup by RECT must be avoided.
The remote control by RECT is carried out by means of the DCC channel which allows to access the
Equipment Controller from the Remote Craft Terminal, as depicted in Fig. 53. on page 116.
DCC control channel uses two radio channels, in 1+1 protected configuration.
The couple of radio channels (x,y in Fig. 53. on page 116) which carry the protected service channel (as
well as the WST channels, if any) is defined via software. These channels can be chosen among the five
couples defined in Tab. 8. on page 50.
Figure in Fig. 43. on page 95 shows the position of the Equipment Controller EC with respect to the
loopback points A,B,C (these loopbacks are named as indicated in previous Fig. 40. thru Fig. 42. ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Therefore, having defined x&y the couple of radio channels transporting the service channel, the following
rules must be followed for loopback settingup:
loopbacks on channels other than x&y:

there are no limitations (as these channels are not used for DCC communication purposes):
loopbacks setup by the local or remote Craft Terminal can be always removed by the local or remote
Craft Terminal
loopbacks on channels x&y (used for DCC communication purposes) setup by the local or remote
Craft Terminal:
ED
can be always removed by the Local Craft Terminal
with regard to the remotion possibility by Remote Craft Terminal :

a)
if only one DCC channel is available, i.e., when any of CHx or CHy is unavailable for
any reason, the loopback cannot be removed by the Remote Craft Terminal, according
to the direction from which the RECT tries (unsuccessfully) to access the controlled NE,
because its EC is not reachable, as depicted in Figures and in Fig. 43. on page 95.
b)
if both DCC channels are available, the loopback remotion by RECT is possible; obviously:
unrecoverable loopbacks must never be setup on both channels CHx and CHy
no failure on the other channel (not loopedback) CHx or CHy should occur in the
meanwhile
otherwise the same unrecoverable condition of previous point a ) will occur.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
94 / 514

To make measures on a loopedback channel meaningful, the following sequence must be followed:
RT
BB
A

C
EC
RT
BB
A
RECT
EC
RT
BB
A
RECT
EC
LOOPBACKS NOT RECOVERABLE BY REMOTE CRAFT TERMINAL

A = RRA (RMD) line loopback (see Fig. 40. on page 93)
B = RRA (RMD) internal loopback (see Fig. 41. on page 93)
C = RFCOH (RMD) Internal loopback (see Fig. 42. on page 93)
Read carefully text to interpret correctly this figure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 43. EC position with respect to loopback points and consequent unavailability by RECT (CHx/y)
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
95 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Read carefully text to interpret correctly this figure
Fig. 44. Allowed and not allowed loopbacks by RECT (CHx/y)
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
96 / 514
EC
EC
BB
1320CT
or OS
RT
STATION 3
RT
NOT ALLOWED LOOPBACKS

(NOT RECOVERABLE BY RECT)
ALLOWED LOOPBACKS
(RECOVERABLE BY RECT)
STATION 0
BB
C
RT
C
B
EC
B
EC
BB
RECT CONTROL
RT
RT
STATION 1
STATION 2
IBB
EC
EC

BB
STATION 0
BB
STATION 3
1320CT
or OS
RT
RT
A = RRA (RMD) line loopback (see Fig. 40. on page 93)

B = RRA (RMD) internal loopback (see Fig. 41. on page 93)
C = RFCOH (RMD) Internal loopback (see Fig. 42. on page 93)
EC
BB
EC
BB
STATION 1
STATION 2
RT

2.7 Signal Transmission

2.7.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes in detail the Signal Transmission features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends
the following main paragraphs:
STM0 & STM1 Transmission

SDH mapping adopted
SDH interface usage
SOH bytes and service channel access
para.2.3 on page 47
para.2.4 on page 51

Hardware components
2.7.2 STM0 & STM1 Transmission

One of the most important peculiarity of the 9600LSY family is to allow the selection of the system capacity
according to the customer needs (and allowing band saving utilizing STM0 capacity, if it can be useful).
In particular, this feature can be applied to 7, 8 and 13 GHz bands, utilizing well defined channel
arrangements for medium capacity transmission. Please refer to section FREQUENCY PLANS & PART
NUMBERS to analyze the frequency arrangements and the channel steps foreseen for the various
frequencies in case of STM0.
Of course, the STM0 transmission is suitable to transport also plesiochronous signals with capacity 21x2
Mbit/s, 1 x 34 Mbit/s or 1 x 45 Mbit/s and the systems have been studied to allow an easy migration from
STM0 to STM1 (or viceversa) when the traffic and the band requirements are going to change.
As far as concerns the Way Side Traffic capacity, it is possible to transmit a single 2 Mbit/s WST stream
for each channel carrying STM1, whether in case of STM0 it is not possible to transmit any WST.
It is necessary to underline that no direct interfaces at STM0 level are foreseen. In case of STM0, the
interface user side is always at STM1 level but only the first VC3 is mapped ; in this way it is possible
to maintain the same electrical or optical interface (part numbers) independently from the signal capacity.
The real transformation between STM1 interface and STM0 signal takes place inside the RRA/Modem
unit before modulation (or after demodulation) function.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In case of migration from one capacity to the other, no RRA change is necessary. Only the modem has
to be substituted inside the baseband assembly; simple hardware and software presettings (with a new
software configuration) are sufficient to upgrade the system.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
97 / 514
2.7.3 SDH mapping adopted
Fig. 45. shows the more generalized multiplexing structure obtained merging the ITUT G.707
multiplexing figure with the correspondent figure of ITUR F.750 (that shows also the RRRP functional
reference point for STM0 transmission).
Note that in European Standard only a subset of the generalized multiplexing structure is adopted, where
only plesiochronous interfaces at 2, 34 and 140 Mbit/s are used, but also the multiplexing of 3xAU3 into
AUG is forbidden (see Fig. 46. ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 45. General Multiplexing Structure
Fig. 46. General European Multiplexing Structure with addition of 45 Mbit/s
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
98 / 514

Generalized Multiplexing structure

2.7.4 SDH interface usage

The system can provide several kinds of user interfaces that may be synchronous (SDH) or
plesiochronous (PDH) and depend on the type of stations involved (Regenerator or WMSN) and the type
of transmitted bit rate (STM1 or STM0)
All the available interfaces are summarized, according to the different possible situations In Tab. 6. on
page 44. Details about electrical characteristic of each interface are reported in chapter Technical
Characteristics.
It is important to point out that in case of WMSN station (obtained coupling a 9600LSY Regenerator with
a 1650SMC device) inside the same rack), the interface between 9600LSY Regenerator and 1650SMC
is electrical and the equipment is represented by two separated N.Es .
Some general information that are valid for each version (line rate, physical interface) of the SDH and PDH
traffic interfaces are herewith outlined:
a)
b)
general rules for SDH unit:
SOH/POH bytes management according to the standard TTP or CTP rules (see also NERM)
Optical interfaces according to the standard G.957 short and long haul (see also NERM)
Automatic Laser Shutdown in compliance with G.958
general rules for PDH unit:
POH bytes management according to the standard TTP rules: (see also NERM)
Asynchronous bit mode mapping into the relevant VC payload.
Structure and /or notstructured PDH signals are transparently transported. The frame
structure information (e.g. : CRC,E,A,S bits) are neither handled nor monitored: bidirectional
passthrough at the PDH/SDH interfaces; furthermore, any potential PDHAIS condition is
transparently forwarded into the relevant VC.
Detection of VC signal fail conditions set to all 1 the outgoing PDH stream.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Detection of the incoming PDHAIS conditions (G.706 standard, detection time = 4 frames) can be
enabled/disabled, without consequent actions at VC layer.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
99 / 514
2.7.5 SOH bytes and service channel access
In the SDH system some SOH bytes (of SDH frame) are used to transmit the service channels. So we
can distinguish:
c)
RSOH bytes, that can be inserted/extracted both in multiplex and in regenerator station,
and
d)
MSOH bytes that can be inserted/extracted only in multiplex station.
Moreover, radio side, the transmission of 1 Way Side Traffic service stream (only in case of STM1
transmission) is performed mapping it on the bytes of two columns of the RFCOH. The AUX/EOW bytes
handled by the Regenerator and by the WMSN support two types of applications:
1)
Local access as termination: the auxiliary bytes of a trail termination can be bidirectionally
interconnected to the voice/data interfaces of the local service unit embedded in the equipment
itself.
2)
Crossconnection: the auxiliary bytes of two different trail terminations can be bidirectionally
interconnected providing an auxiliary channel passthrough between every couple of STM1
ports or different OH sections; it means each single byte can be configured to be
passedthrough from one direction (i.e. line side) to another one (i.e. radio side).
The auxiliary bytes connections are always unprotected and the selection of the bytes and the ports are
performed by CT/OS. The dashed cells in Tab. 9. herebelow show the set of potential OH bytes suitable
to be processed as auxiliary channels at the section or the path terminations, with the associated meaning.
RFCOH is a proprietary function implemented to transmit radio specific information (DSI, ATPC,
MC, WST) and to reroute over radio hop a few RSOH byte terminated.
Tab. 9. OH bytes suitable for handling on MST
RSOH
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MSOH
ED
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
J0
J1
B1
E1
D1
D2
B2
B2
B2
K1
D4
D5
D7
D8
D10
D11
S1
M1
F1
B3
D3
C2
G1
K2
F2
VC4/3
D6
H4
OH
D9
F3
D12
K3
E2
N1
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
100 / 514

2.7.5.1 Overview

Tab. 10. OH bytes suitable for handling on RST
RSOH
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
J0
B1
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3
3
4
5
6
MSOH
PASS THROUGH
8
9
Tab. 11. RFCOH byte structure

Column 1
Column 2
DSI
MC
ATPC
MC
D1
MC
D2
MC
D3
MC
E1
FAIL serv + K0
F1
d,n,f
d,n,f
d,n,f
d,n,f
d,n,f
where the meaning of the bytes is summarized as follows:

for RSOH bytes:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A1A2:
J0:
d:
n:
f:
B1:
E1:
F1:
D1D2D3:
ED
6 bytes: A1= (11110110) A2=(00101000) for frame alignment;

RS Trace for STM identification;
6 bytes for media specific usage;
4 bytes reserved for National Use;
4 bytes reserved for Future international standardization;
RS Error checking (BIP8) for regeneration section.
RS Voice for order wire channel;
data channel as user channel;
RS DCC data communication channel [192 Kb/s (TMN bytes for regenerator
section)];
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
101 / 514
B2:
E2:
n:
f:
K1K2:
D4..D12:
S1:
M1:
MS Error checking (BIP24) for terminal station.

MS Express channel.
2 bytes reserved for National Use;
26 bytes reserved for Future international standardization;
MPS channel K1(b1..b8) and K2(b1..b5), MSFERF/AIS K2(b6..b8):
110 indicates that the receive end is detecting a section failure or is receiving
MSAIS;
MS DCC data communication channel [576 Kb/s (TMN bytes for multiplex section)];
SDH Synchronization Quality Level: S1 (b5..b8)
Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication
for POH bytes:

J1:
B3:
C2:
G1:
F2:
F3:
H4:
K3:
N1:
Path trace (check end to end path connection)

Performance monitoring (BIP8 of VC4)
Signal label (full or empty VC)
Path status (FERF,FEBE) backward to the origin
Path user service channel
Path user service channel
Multiframe alignment (indicates tributary location)
4 bits for APS channel, 4 bits spare
Network operator byte for Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM) function
for RFCOH bytes:

Proprietary channels
MC:
k0:
DSI:
ATPC:
Monitoring channel:EWL, EWH, HBER, RTF, FAIL SERV.

Proprietary radio channel identifier
Digital Switching Information channel for RPS
Data channel for automatic transmitting power control
RSOH bytes rerouted over radio hop
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
E1:
F1:
D1D2D3:
ED
radio Order Wire

radio data channel
RS DCC data communication channel [192 Kb/s (TMN bytes for regenerator
section)];
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
102 / 514

for MSOH bytes:
2.7.5.2 Regenerator Case

As far as the 9600LSY Regenerator, it allows the management of:
Termination of RSOH or RFCOH bytes to auxiliary ports

RSOH RFCOH bytes cross connection
The following Tab. 12. shows for the Regenerator the possible AUX/EOW user interfaces suitable to
access the terminated channels:
Tab. 12. Reg. AUX/EOW user interfaces
USER INTERFACES
QUANTITY
9600 baud with interface V24/V28 (selectable)
64 Kb/s G.703 (one is 64/128Kb/s selectable)
64 Kb/s V11
64/128 Kb/s V11 (SW configurable)
64 Kb/s G.703 (Party line)
Voice frequency (E1) (EOW)
Voice frequency (E1) (Party line)
Voice frequency (point to point between adjacent radio sections)
Among them it is possible to choose, by software presetting, up to six 64 Kbit/s channels plus one voice
frequency channel (EOW), to be transmitted radio side in 1+1 protected way and to be dropped and
inserted in every radio station.
With reference to Tab. 10. on page 101, the RSOH bytes terminated line side may be in principle mapped
upon software configuration control in the following interfaces as summarized in the following table:
USER INTERFACES
RFCOH bytes (line side) [1]
V.11
V.24
G.703
EOW
(Q 23)
E1
F1
d,f,n [2]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Notes:
[1]
[2]
ED
For the DCCR (D1D3) and J0 the interfaces is towards SC

max 14 bytes d,n,f.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
103 / 514

With reference to Tab. 11. on page 101, the RSOH bytes terminated radio side through the RFCOH
function may be in principle mapped upon software configuration control in the following interfaces as
summarized in the following table:
USER INTERFACES
RFCOH bytes (radio side) [1]
V.11
V.24
G.703
EOW
(Q 23)
E1
F1
5 bytes out of d,f,n
Note:
[1] For the DCCR (D1D3) and k0 the interface is towards SC
Practically common usage of user interfaces and possible mapping is:
E1 always terminated on the EOW two ways (line side and radio side)
F1 plus max 3 bytes accessible (normally radio side) through the user interfaces 2 x 64 Kb/s, 1 x
V11 and 1 x V24.
Each interface (with the exception of the voice type ) supports only one direction; the same byte can
be assigned to different direction (for example line side and radio side) using 2 interfaces.
Way Side Traffic (WST)

Additionally, the regenerator allows the transmission, radio side, of one 2 Mb/s Way Side Traffic (WST)
that represents a service traffic in addition to the main one.
Both the WST and service channels are transmitted using the radio frame complementary overhead
(RFCOH, an arbitrary and unstandardized extra SDH frame overhead).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The main features of the 2 Mbit/s WST Channels management are the following:
STM1 capacity:
One 2 Mbit/s Way Side Traffic can be inserted in each STM1 channel whatever is the channel
spacing (28, 29, 29,65, 30, 40 MHz) used in the channel plans.
STM0 capacity:
No 2 Mbit/s Way Side Traffic can be inserted.
WST protection:
WST can be transmitted in unprotected way, one for each radio channel, by means of the interfaces
(1.0/2.3 75 Ohm coax male connectors) allocated in the access area of the subrack.
The possibility to transmit one 2Mb/s WST stream in protected way (on channels 0 and 1 ) is also
given. In this case the access is located on the front panel of Service unit that hosts the WST switching
functionality.
Automatic switching criteria are : Signal Fail (SF), HBER, LBER and EW.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
104 / 514

2.7.5.3 WMSN Case

WMSN functionality is realized utilizing a1650SMC adddrop multiplexer .
When WMSN functionality is implemented, all the accesses to services are located on the 1650SMC unit,
and the ones located on the regenerator section no longer are no longer utilized.
For the description of the available service channels relevant to this unit, please refer to 1650SMC
Technical Handbook.
For an easy clarification about the service accesses, hereafter the front view of the 1650SMC view is
reported in Fig. 47. herebelow. The service access ports are located on the SERGI card:
for the DCCR (D1D3) and J0 the interfaces is towards SC

for the DCCM (D4D12) , S1 and M1 the interface is towards SC.
POH bytes of terminated VC4
In particular, the SERGI unit supplies the access to the auxiliary channels (A) and to the 2 Mb/s Service
stream (B) . Moreover, the connection for the telephone jack is present (C).
(A)
(B)
(C)
1650SMC
SERGI
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 47. 1650SMC and unit SERGI front view
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
105 / 514
The EOW Channel allows the access to the phone services of the system.
It is interfaced with the telephone set with DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) Tones and with association
circuits, branching, exchange and receiving of the phone signal.
The EOW Channel allows the following types of linking:
between two station (selective call)
between one station and all the others (omnibus call)
between one and more stations called in selective mode (multi selective call).
Numbering System
The compatibility with the actual generation of devices is guaranteed by the type of numbering used, with
the two digits that identify the actual
The above statement, limited the max number of devices linked in 90.
Is important to remember that the numbers available are from 10 to 99.
The omnibus call number is identify in the number 00, as in the actual boards.
The multiselective call can be utilized connecting in conference mode up to the maximum number of
available telephone numbers (90).
This new release is full compatible with the current systems, except few new features here below
described:
Introduction of the time checks during a phones call.
Automatic ring management (Routing)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A second voice channel is also available for voice transmission in point to point link between adjacent
regenerator terminals. The interface is present on the connector area of the baseband equipment and
the channel can be addressed on one byte of RFCOH .
In case of WMSN configuration it is possible also to connect by cable the service to 1650SMC unit to be
inserted in MSOH and to be available in MST sections.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
106 / 514

2.7.5.4 Engineering Order Wire characteristic
2.7.5.5 Data Channel Characteristics

a)
In case of G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface the timing signals (64 KHz and 8 KHz) are derived
from the data stream.
Fig. 48. G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface

b)
In case of RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface the timing signal (64 KHz and 8
KHz) are directed towards the user. The code is NRZ.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 49. RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
107 / 514
In case of RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous up to 9600 baud no timing signals are required. The signal
is internally over sampled up to 64 KHZ. The code is NRZ.
c)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 50. RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous interface
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
108 / 514

2.8 Synchronization
2.8.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes in detail the Synchronization features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the
following main paragraphs:
Introduction
Synchronization in Regenerator station
Synchronization in WMSN station by means of 1650SMC ADM
para.2.3 on page 47
para.2.4 on page 51

Hardware components
2.8.2 Introduction
SDH transmission operates on general principles that implies the existence of timing devices that form
part of a synchronizing network.
Different behaviors for synchronization are present depending from the type of station either Regenerator
or WMSN.
2.8.3 Synchronization in Regenerator station

In this case each incoming STM1 stream takes the network synchronization that is recovered by the
equipment and forwarded to the radio hop or to the line retiming the transmitted signal by means of the
recovered clock.
The regenerator does not need any other synchronization circuit.
2.8.4 Synchronization in WMSN station by means of 1650SMC ADM

The synchronization requirements implies that a WMSN equipment must include a synchronization
subsystem for a slave clock which functions are specified in ITUT Rec. G.783 as the Synchronous
Equipment Timing Source (SETS).
The Alcatel 9600LSY radio families are provided with 1650SMC ADM unit that supplies such
functionalities.
By selecting the external or internal reference source, the equipment works synchronized to the reference.
The 1650SMC unit can automatically change the reference involved if the selected one is not correct
or can holdover the operation mode if no input reference is available.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1650SMC supplies the synchronizing and timing signals to all the equipment units (N.B.) by selecting
the synchronizing signal among the available input references.
To this purpose the unit can:
select the reference source involved;
change the reference (or mode) when it losses synchronism;
lock the Local Oscillator to the reference available;
work in Hold Over/Free Running LO mode when all references are lost.
N.B.
ED
In a radio terminal only the ADM takes directly the synchronism from the internal
synchronization path, while units of other subracks take indirectly the synchronism by means
of its own phase locked oscillators (e.g. modemodulators). Finally there are units that do not
need synchronism at all (e.g. units of transceiver).
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
109 / 514
The automatic selection of one of the possible synchronization sources is performed on the base of quality
(SSM algorithm) or priority criteria:
a)
Priority Algorithm
See flow chart in Fig. 51. on page 112.
The reference source choice is performed checking the signal quality by detecting for every STM1
synchronization source:
LOS (= LOS + MSAIS + LOF + EXCBER)

DRIFT
and for every 2 Bit/s interface or synchronous tributary selected as source:
b)
LOS (= LOS + AIS + LOF)

DRIFT
LOF (+ LOM + CRC4 MISMATCH) For 2 Mbit/s interface only
SSM Algorithm
See flow chart in Fig. 52. on page 113.
If the Timing Marker procedure is enabled, the CRU checks the S1 Bytes from the synchronous frame
of the selected sources and the preset value of the 2 Mbit/s sources then, by the SSM algorithm,
chooses the better source to be used.
The SSM algorithm is in compliance with ETSI DE/TM 10156.
The two Algorithms define synchronization source, by switching the reference.
The switch between the source is hitless.
The switch from one reference to the other one occurs without passing through the Holdover mode.
The reference, sent to the PLL circuits, generates the 622 MHz signal used for internal
synchronization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The PLL can operates in these following different modes:
ED
Normal
The PLL output is frequency locked to one of the selected references.
Holdover
In absence of an external reference, the clock stored the frequency difference to the last
reference.
This information is used to fix the oscillator frequency value.
The holdover mode guarantees .37 ppm of frequency drift within the first 24 h
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
110 / 514

The Compact ADM unit also provides an output synchronization signal at 2.048 MHz with an interface
according G.703 (T4 signal in G783)
This signal is squelched when the unit is working in Free Running or in Hold Over modes.
A maximum of 6 independent references can be defined by mixing type and PDH/SDH parts (the selection
is accomplished by means of craft terminal).
The selection may happen between:
timing reference signals coming from the TTF blocks on CompactADM (T1 signal in G783)
timing reference signals coming from the SDH ports (T1 signal in G783)
2.048 MHz signal coming from the PDH ports (T2 signal)
2.048 MHz clock coming from external source (T3 signal in G783)
The choice of the sources can be made in independent manner for the internal clock reference output and
for the external 2 MHz output.
By Craft Terminal it is also possible either to enable or to disable the Timing Marker algorithm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
Free running
Without any reference and information stored in memory, the VCO oscillates at its natural
frequency.
Frequency variations can be due to temperature variations, components degradation etc.
The free running stability is 4.6 ppm. The following setting can also be managed by Craft
Terminal:
Lock out
The command allows to disable/enable a timing input from being considered as possible source
of timing.
Forced switch
The command allows to force the selection of a timing input.
If the source forced becomes unavailable, the internal oscillator will be selected.
Manual selection of timing source

The command allows to force the selection of a timing input.
If the source manual selected becomes unavailable, the manual mode is terminated and
automatic selection algorithm is initiated.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
111 / 514

The allowable timing references, pointing by S, must be arranged according to decreasing priority
level (i.e. priority level of timing reference pointing by Sj is y than priority level of Sj+1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 51. Synchronization Reference Source Priority Algorithm Flow Chart
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
112 / 514

The allowable timing references, pointing by S, must be arranged according to decreasing priority
level (i.e. priority level of timing reference pointing by Sj is >= than priority level of Sj+1).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 52. SSM Algorithm Flow Chart
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
113 / 514
2.9.1 Foreword
This paragraph introduces the Equipment control features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the
following main paragraphs:
para.2.9.2
para.2.9.3
para.2.9.4
para.2.9.5
para.2.9.6
herebelow
on page 115
on page 117
on page 117
on page 118
Introduction
The NE architecture
The F interface
The Qecc/QB3 interface
ECT and RECT
2.9.2 Introduction
9600LSY Digital Radio Relay Systems cannot operate correctly without Control and Management
Functions which are usually partially embedded as Synchronous Equipment Management Function
(SEMF) and Message Communication Function (MCF) in the involved Network elements..
Equipment control may be performed locally through an Equipment Craft Terminal (1320 CT) or remotely
through a Craft Terminal in a remote site.
External control units may be dedicated to a Radio subnetwork or may be the Control Elements of an SDH
Network including Radio Links, Fiber Optic Lines, Synchronous Multiplexers and CrossConnect
Equipment.
Inside an overall Managed Telecommunication Network, SDH Digital Radio Relay Systems are part of a
Managed Synchronous Network. The 9600LSY DRRS equipment interfaces the TMN according to ETSI
Standard and ITUT Rec G.784, G.773 and ITUR Rec 750.
The architecture of the management process, which is intrinsically a distributed process based on
Manager and Agent Functions, may influence in the design, the Equipment Control Architecture and the
identification of the Network Elements to be managed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To connect SDH Radio Equipment to a TMN System Qtype Interfaces are used, adopting the standard
Infomodel based QType Interfaces Qecc and QB3 for a full integration in a multivendor environment.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
114 / 514

2.9 Equipment Control

2.9.3 The NE architecture

A Digital Radio Relay Link identified as a Radio Switching Section is composed of two Radio Relay
Terminals (RRT). Each physical entity RRT is a SDH NEs and therefore according to ITUT Rec G.784
they must have TMN Q3 and Qecc Interfaces.
All the SDH NE must be able to terminate the Regenerator Section (RS).
Two types of RRT are available depending on the ability to terminate a Multiplex Section (MS) or a
Regenerator Section (RS) only. This ability is required when the RRT having PDH tributaries (140 Mb/s,
2, 34 or 45 Mb/s) behaves like an SDH Multiplexer (i.e. WMSN station composed at least by two NEs:
1650SMC + LHR). When the RRT has SDH tributaries this ability is not strictly required and therefore the
RRT may be equipped with an RRA (Radio Regenerator Adaptation) Assembly (Regenerator station
equal to the NE LHR/LHRC).
Associated to the RS and the MS there are in the SOH of the SDH frame two Embedded Control Channels
(having as physical interfaces the D1D3 bytes in the RSOH and D4D12 bytes in the MSOH) carrying
the management information between the ends of the RS and MS respectively. These channels are
terminated in the Message Communication Function (MCF), located in the Equipment Controller of the
NE, which behaves like a Packet Switching Node. The communication interface of these channels on the
physical interfaces D1D3 and D4D12 is a 7layer full OSI protocol stack as defined in ITUT Rec G.784
named Qecc.
While the intersite or interoffice communications links between SDH NEs will normally be formed from
the SDH ECCs, within a particular site (intrasite connections) or when the SDH NE is acting as Gateway
Network Element (GNE) towards a Data Communication Network connecting the NE with an Operation
System (OS) a 7layer full OSI protocol stack named QBX is used. QBX is a Q3 type interface and with
reference to the foreseen protocol suites: QB1 is a Connection oriented over X.25 (CONS1) interface, QB2
is a Connectionless Mode over X.25 (CLNS2) interface and QB3 is a Connectionless Mode over ISO 8802
LAN interface.
The previous Qtype interfaces in their standardized versions implies the use of a Management
Application Software based on an objectoriented Information Model and the use at the 7th layer of the
OSI stack of protocols as CMISE, ROSE and ACSE.
The availability on the NE of all these QType TMN interfaces do not imply the contemporary use of all
of them. Their use and the criteria for selecting them is the TMN network designer responsibility according
to the management traffic load and the network layout. The only limitation imposed by standards is that
in the RRRs (and obviously in the RRTs equipped with RRA) the only RSOH has to be terminated
whereas the MSOH has to be passedthrough.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
As far as the QB3 and Qecc interfaces is concerned the following criteria in their use have been adopted.
In the WMSN station equipped with the Mux assembly, on the line side the DCC bytes of the MSOH and
the RSOH are transferred to the MCF and then processed by the SEMF or rerouted by the MCF to their
destination. While the DCCM bytes of the MSOH are reinserted in the SDH frame, the DCCR bytes of
the RSOH are reinserted in the SDH frame through the RFCOH and MODEM units with 1+1 protection
(Radio Channel 1 and 0). In the Regenerator station, while the DCCR of the RSOH are processed in the
same way as previously described, the MSOH remains untouched and is carried transparently.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
115 / 514
TR
STATION B
TR
radio channels x,y

(N.B.)
D1D3
radio channels x,y

(N.B.)
MD
MD
RPS
RPS
radio channels x,y

(N.B.)
radio channels x,y

D4D12
D4D12
D1D3
RRA
D4D12
D1D3
RRA
SEMF
SEMF
F
MCF
MCF
1320CT
QB3
QB3
ECT for Station A

RECT for Station B
Fig. 53. DCC management: Regenerator case
STATION A (REG.)
TR
STATION B (WMSN)
radio channels x,y

(N.B.)
TR
D1D3
MD
MD
RPS
radio channels x,y

(N.B.)
RPS
D4D12
D4D12
D1D3
RRA
RRA
SEMF
SEMF
MCF
MCF
MUX
D4D12
D1D3
D1D3
SEMF
F
MCF
F
1320CT
QB3
ECT for Station A

RECT for Station B
1320CT
QB3
ECT for Station B

RECT for Station A
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 54. DCC management: WMSN case

N.B.
ED
The couple of radio channels (x,y in Fig. 53. and Fig. 54. above) which carry the protected
service channel (as well as the WST channels, if any) is defined via software. These channels
can be chosen among the five couples defined in Tab. 8. on page 50.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
116 / 514

STATION A

2.9.4 The F interface

The F interface is the control interface connecting a Craft Terminal to a Equipment Controller.
The F interface is not a standard interface since in TMN there is only the F interface as reference point
between WSF (Work Station Function) and OSF (Operation System Function) and the F interface is not
yet standardized.
An F interface has been standardized for all the ALCATEL equipment and is using the following protocols:
Physical Layer:
Standard: EIA RS232C/ITUT V24V28
Type: Pointtopoint, Asynchronous full Duplex
Transmission rate: 38600 bit/s
Connector: 9 pin female Sub D
Data Link Layer:

Asynchronous HDLC standard protocol
ISO 3309 ISO 4335 ISO 7809
In 9600LSY terminal regenerator, F interface is located on the front panel of the System Controller unit.
In case of WMSN configuration, F interface available on 1650SMC unit is the one to be utilized as terminal
interface and represents the unique access to the terminal. In this case, by means of RECT software it
is possible to control, besides all the other terminals, also the functionality of the regeneration section
of the WMSN terminal. For this reason, the RECT option has to be always foreseen in case of WMSN
functionality.
2.9.5 The Qecc/QB3 interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In the TMN (Telecommunication Management Network) Architecture, while Qecc is the communication
interface on the DCCs (Data Communication Channel) used as ECCs (Embedded Control Channel) in a
SDH Subnetwork, the QB3 interface is used to interface the SDH Subnetwork to the OSs, usually through
a DCN (Data Communication Network). The Gateway Function performing the protocol conversion (from
Qecc to QB3 and vice versa) is carried out by the GNE (Gateway Network Element) of the subnetwork.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
117 / 514
2.9.6 ECT and RECT
ALCATEL TMN management products 1320 CT called Craft Terminals (CT) consists of a compatible
personal computer and application software specially developed for monitoring transmission
equipment. The CT designed to monitor a single transmission equipment is called Equipment Craft
Terminal (ECT) or 1320 CT.
For each station an ALCATEL proprietary Software Package (SWP) is to be employed:
SWP REG. 9600LSY for the Regenerator station
and, additionally, SWP 1650SMC for the WMSN station.

The Equipment Craft Terminal, connected to the F interface of the Equipment Controller, enable an
operator to perform locally the following Element Management functions:
Equipment Management
Transmission Management
Test management
External points management
Alarm (fault) management
Synchronization management
Radio Management
Performance Monitoring Management
Event log manager
Overhead Management
Connection Management
Software Management
Communication and Routing Management
Security Management
Support Management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RECT
The Remote Equipment Craft Terminal is a feature only present in the Single NE Link architecture
which allows the local operator, using an ECT connected to the F interface of the Equipment
Controller, to zoom and perform a complete set of management operations on all the reachable SDH
NEs in the SDH.
The Remote NE can be physically reached through QB3/Qecc.
The Remote Craft Terminal feature applies in NR5 to both Q3 and QB3* NEs, with the exception of
DXC. The feature is basically the same as for NR3 NEs, with the usual difference related to the
support of TSDIM interface for the management of Q3 NEs.
Despite the fact that this is supposed to be a NE related feature, it becomes a network feature
considering that the network can be composed of both Q3 and QB3* NEs and that an harmonization
is necessary between the two technologies.
The IMCT is able to manage both Q3 and QB3* NEs (in the sense that both QB3* and Q3 application
are working simultaneously), but it shall be connected to a Q3 NE. Viceversa Nectas CT will keep
on being able to manage only QB3* NEs, and it shall obviously be connected to a QB3* NE.
Its worth reminding that RECT can be connected to any NE pertaining to the same area of the local
NE and to any NE pertaining to different areas (assuming that the DCN network has been correctly
designed and hence interarea communication is possible from networking viewpoint).
As far as DXC is concerned, the RECT feature is not supported, i.e. a DXC CT can be connected
to only one DXC at a time.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
118 / 514

ECT

Of course, due to the limitation of the physical resources in the Equipment Controller of the NE, some
network design constraints must be taken into account as the total number of managed NEs (64),
the number of the QB3 NEs (32), the number of the QB3* NEs (32), the number of associations
permanently open (31) between the CT and the remote NEs.
The RECT features and limitations are briefly the following:
1)
The RECT function provides a remote login facility similar to those offered by an OS to manage
several configured NEs, included the local one.
The contemporaneous presence of the RECT function and an OS is possible. The access
disable flag avoids access conflict between the OS and both RECT and ECT on some
operations as configuration modification and remote control with access filtering.
The NE which may be remotely controlled by a RECT must be configured and must be loaded
with the same SW version supporting the RECT function. A NE not supporting RECT function
shall refuse the incoming association issued by a RECT and the ECT displays only local
information.
Only three RECTs shall be active at a time over one NE. The coexistence of ECTs and RECTs
in the whole network is guaranteed since the conflict in configuring the QB3 NEs is solved locally
by the NE itself.
The operator, through the RECT function, is able to see the alarm synthesis of the whole
network .
In a SDH network the maximum number of QB3 NEs equipped with the RECT function are 32
and the maximum number of NEs (QB3* NEs and QB3 NEs) manageable by the RECT function
are 64. These figures identify what it is understood as small SDH network for which the RECT
function may substitute the Element Manager.
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
N.B.
Refer to CT Operators Handbooks listed in Tab. 79. on page 468, Tab. 82. on page 470, and
para.18.2.2.2 on page 471 for further information on:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
HW and SW requirement of the PC to be used as ECT and RECT

detailed description of ECT and RECT functionalities and operations allowed.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
119 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
120 / 514

3 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION
3.1 Introduction
This chapter gives detailed operative information regarding:
Please refer to chapter 4 on page 175 detailed operative information regarding:
system cabling
pinout description of connectors for Customer usage

and is organized as follows:
Part list:
on page 122
Rack and shelves summary:
on page 126
Top Rack Unit (TRU)
on page 128
Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves
General equipping rules

on page 129
Channel provisioning/expansion guideline

on page 131
Base Band shelf

on page 134, including:
Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules

on page 135
SYSTEM CONTROLLER unit operative information

on page 140
SERVICE unit operative information

on page 144
RRACHANNEL unit operative information

on page 147
RRASTANDBY unit operative information

on page 149
MODEM unit operative information

on page 150
PSU and PSF units operative information

on page 153
Additional Housekeeping unit operative information

on page 154
Kit Loudspeaker operative information

on page 155
Transceiver shelf
Transceiver shelf unit layout
Equipping rules of Transceiver units or substitutive Dummy Plates
Composition of transceiver units
TRANSCEIVER unit operative information
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
the equipments items (P/Ns, equipping rules, labels for remote inventory)
their physical and logical position in the system
the unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description of the access
points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons)
hardware setting description
ED
Branching
Branching drawings and BranchingTransceivers connections
Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area)
on page 156
on page 156
on page 157
on page 158
on page 168
on page 168
FANS shelf and FANS assembled unit

FANS shelf equipping rules

on page 169
FANS assembled unit equipping rules

on page 169
FANS assembled unit operative information

on page 171
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
121 / 514
3.2 Part list
REF [x] is used in other parts of this handbook to refer to the item.
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
MAX
Qty
OPTINEX RACK WITH TRU
3AN44815AA
282501018
[2]
OPTINEX RACK WITHOUT TRU
3AN44816AA
282501019
[3]
TRU
3DB00734AA
593230032
CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A 72VDC
1AB162710001
001791351
1AB162710002
001791352
1AB162710003
001791353
1AB162710005
001791355
1AB162710006
001791356
1AB162710007
001791357
KIT FUSERBREAKER
3DB03114AA
299702945
REF NAME
EQUIP.
RULES
POS
RACK AND TRU

[1]
[4]
(A) in Fig. 55.

page 126
para.
2.4.2
page 51
(B) in Fig. 55.

page 126
para.3.4 page 128
SUBRACKS
[5]
SUBRACK 2G LH
3DB02143AA
593230033
(D) in Fig. 55.

page 126
[6]
RT SUBRACK
3DB02294AA
593230034
(G) in Fig. 55.

page 126
FANS SUBRACK H=50
3DB03242AA
593230036
(E) , (L)
in Fig. 55.
page 126
3DB03238AA
411200559
[7]
[8]
FANS ASSEMBLED
(A) in Fig. 91.

page 169
para. 3.9
page 169
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 13. continues ...
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
122 / 514

Tab. 13. 9600LSY Part list Common parts (frequency independent)

REF NAME
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
MAX
Qty
POS
EQUIP.
RULES
SYSTEM WIRING
[9]
CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS
3DB02842AA
299702891
[10]
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL NO

SPACE DIV.
3DB02843AA
299702892
[11]
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL WITH

SPACE DIV
3DB02844AA
299702893
[12]
CABLE KIT FOR REUSE

(1 RACK)
3DB02845AA
299702894
[13]
CABLE KIT FOR REUSE

(2 RACKS)
3DB02846AA
299702895
[14]
CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN.

CHANNEL FOR WMSN
3DB03202AA
299702950
3DB03264AA
299702953
FANS UNIT EXTENSION

CABLE KIT
3DB03266AA
299702954
PLUGS KIT COMMON PART

(LSY)
3DB03213AA
299702951
PLUGS KIT 1 CHANNEL

EXTENSION (LSY)
3DB03214AA
299702952
[15] FANS UNIT CABLE KIT

[16]
para.4.3
on page 183
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
123 / 514
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
MAX
Qty
POS
3DB02147AA
411200537
(C) in Fig. 64.

page 135
[18] RRA STANDBY
3DB02151AA
411200538
[19] MODEM LH STM1 1WST
3DB02136AA
411200535
[20] MODEM LH STM0 0WST
3DB02140AA
411200536
REF NAME
EQUIP.
RULES
RSA/RRA
[17] RRA CHANNEL
[21] CANCCOMB STM1
3DB00829AA
487210334
16
[22] CANCCOMB STM0
3DB03373AA
487210822
[23] SERVICE
3DB02155AA
411200539
[24] ADDITIONAL VOICE
3DB02158AA
483200156
[25] SYSTEM CONTROLLER
3DB02162AA
411200540
[26]
[27]
48MB FLASH CARD

(standard)
1AB15177001
084617912
FLASH CARD 80MB

(for future applications)
1AB15050001
084617902
(G) in Fig. 64.

page 135
Tab. 19.
pg 137
Tab. 20.
pg 138
(D) in Fig. 64.
page 135
Tab. 20.
pg 138
&
Fig. 74.
pg 151
(B) in Fig. 64.

page 135
Tab. 18.
pg 136
(A) in Fig. 64.

page 135
Tab. 16.
pg 136
Fig. 65.
page 140
Tab. 16.
pg 136
[28] ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING
3DB02740AA
411200550
(H) in Fig. 55.

page 126
Tab. 17.
pg 136
[29] DC/DC CONVERTER BB 2G LH
3DB00619AA
478200004
(E) in Fig. 64.

page 135
Tab. 21.
pg 138
[30] FILTER P.S.U. 5.3/3.4V
3DB01806AA
478200006
3AL78815AA
474166420
3AL78815AB
474166424
(F) in Fig. 64.

page 135
Tab. 23.
pg 139
OPTICAL MODULES
[31] S1.1 OPTIC.INTERF. FC/PC
[32] S1.1 OPTIC. INTERF. SC/PC
(C) , (G)
in Fig. 64.
page 135
Tab. 19.
pg 137
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
124 / 514


ANV P/N
Factory P/N
MAX
Qty
POS
EQUIP.
RULES
3DB03382AA
299702965
(F) in Fig. 55.

page 126
Tab. 28.
pg 168
3AN49589AA
299701212
(C) + (D)
in Fig. 64.
page 135
3DB03010AA
299702912
(E) inFig. 64.

page 135
[36] RT FRONT PLATE KIT
3DB03190AA
299702947
(A) in Fig. 79.

page 156
Tab. 27.
pg 156
[37] COVER
3DB03609AA
261202666
Fig. 92.
page 171
Tab. 29.
pg 169
[38] KIT LOUDSPEAKER
3DB04125AA
299722014
(J) in Fig. 55.

page 126
Tab. 24.
pg 139
[39] TELEPHONE KIT (DTMF)
3CY07335AA
299702019
[40] LSY SYSTEM TOOL KIT
3DB03008AA
299702910
[41] LSY MAINTENANCE TOOL KIT
3DB03007AA
299702909
DISTRIBUTOR FRAME M.W.W.
3DB01926AA
487239034

REF NAME
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
[33]
BRANCHING FRONT PLATE

KIT
[34] DUMMY PLATE W40 (RRA)
[35]
DUMMY PLATE L40 (DC/DC

CONV.)
Tab. 22.
pg 139
para.3.6.3
on page 144
para.7.3.2
on page 358
t.b.d.
future release
TRANSCEIVERS: Refer to part lists specific for each frequency (i.e. specific chapter listed in
Tab. 67. on page 414).
SOFTWARE AND SOFTWARE LICENCES: Refer to Operators Handbooks listed in Tab. 79. on
page 468
INSTALLATION MATERIALS: Refer to Installation Handbook ref.[E] on page 469
DOCUMENTATION: Refer to para.18.2 on page 466.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
end of Tab. 13.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
125 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
J
955.203.292 Q
I
C
L
REGENERATOR
3DB 02839 AA AA
514

3.3 Rack and shelves summary
WMSN
Legend on page 127

Fig. 55. Rack and shelves layout
03
126 / 514

Tab. 14. Rack and shelves
POS in
NAME
Fig. 55.
[1]
OPTINEX RACK WITHOUT

TRU
[2]
(B)
TRU
[3]
(C)
ADDITIONAL
HOUSEKEEPING
[28]
(D)
SUBRACK 2G LH
[5]
(E)
(L)
FANS SUBRACK H=50
[7]
Area for Rx branching
BRANCHING FRONT
PLATE KIT
[33]
(G)
RT SUBRACK
[6]
(H)
Area for Tx branching
(I)
1650SMC
(J)
KIT LOUDSPEAKER
[38]
(F)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DESCRIPTION
OPTINEX RACK WITH TRU

(A)
ED
P/N
(REF in Tab. 13. on page 122)
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
127 / 514
3.4 Top Rack Unit (TRU)
RED (1)
RED (2)
YELLOW
GREEN
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B
BREAKERS
BATTERY A
BREAKERS
BATTERY B
Fig. 56. Top Rack Unit front view

The main functions are:
a)
Power supply distribution to all the functional blocks present in the rack.
It is possible to distribute the two battery voltages up to 6 functional blocks installed into the rack.
All the output voltages are protected by automatic circuit breakers (up to 12).
In general, the choice of the breakers, existing also for lower current ranges, has to be chosen
following the effective current consumption needed by the subracks.
Maximum current supplied by each battery shall not exceed 60 A.
Tab. 15. TRU breaker utilization in 9600 LSY/LHR
BREAKER
NUMBER
USAGE
MAX
ABSORBED
POWER (W)
NOMINAL
ABSORBED
CURRENT (A)
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
1A and 1B
transceiver slot 1 to 5
335
12.5
15 A
2A and 2B
transceiver slot 6 to 10
335
12.5
15 A
3A and 3B
baseband subrack
250
9.5
10 A
4A and 4B
ADM 1650 SMC
5A and 5B
FANS for BB subrack
40
1.5
2A
6A and 6B
FANS for ADM subrack
40
1.5
2A
N.B.
see 1650 SMC documentation
4A
The value of circuit breakers is determined as follows:
Circuit Breaker (A) = [ (Max Absorbed Power (W)) / (Nominal Battery Voltage (48V)) * 1.5 * 1.2]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For circuit breaker and Fuserbreaker P/Ns see REF.NO TAG in Tab. 13. on page 122
b)
Station alarm management

A rack lamp unit is inserted in the TRU box to display the rack alarm general indications.
For the lamp meaning description, please refer to para.7.4.2 on page 363.
c)
Extension Q2 bus unit or rack alarm distribution unit (optional units, in alternative).
Top Rack Unit Hardware settings

Please refer to OPTINEX rack specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.1 on page 471).
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
128 / 514

The T.R.U. subrack is located at the rack top area of the OPTINEX rack and appears as follows:

3.5 Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves

3.5.1 General equipping rules
According to Fig. 57. herebelow and Fig. 58. on page 130:
a)
in Base Band shelf, units SYSCO, SERV, PSF1 and PSF2 are always equipped
b)
the number associated to RRA, MD and PSU groups is related to physical (but not necessarily also
logical) channel (0 9). The same number identifies the associated TRI
PHYSICAL CHANNEL
c)
BASE BAND SHELF
TR SHELF
RRA0
MD0
PSU0
TRI0
RRA1
MD1
PSU1
TRI1
....
....
....
....
....
RRA9
MD9
PSU9
TRI9
only 8 RRA, MD and PSU groups and the associated TRI can be equipped at most. The slot positions
that must be used depend on the system configuration; in particular:
1)
with single polarization configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups must be equipped in
the logical number sequence 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 (see Fig. 59. on page 131).
Thus, in these configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups 8 and 9 are never equipped, as
depicted in Fig. 57. herebelow;
S R
R
M
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
R
R
E R
D
D
S R
D
D
A
A
A
A
0
3
C V
2
1
2
1
3
0
O
R M R M R M
R D R D R D
D
A 5 A 6 A 7
A
4
5
4
7
6
R
R
R M R M
R D R D
A 8 A 9
9
8
UNITS
NEVER
EQUIPPED
Fig. 57. Layout of max 8 channels in single polarization configurations
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
129 / 514
with double polarization configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups must be equipped in
the sequence 0, 8, .... (see Fig. 60. on page 132, Fig. 61. on page 133 and Fig. 62. on page
133).
Thus, in these configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups 4 and 5 are never equipped, as
depicted in Fig. 58. herebelow;
S R
R
M
R
R
R
E R
D
D
S R
D
D
A
A
A
A
3
0
C V
1
2
2
1
3
0
O
R M
R D
A 7
7
R M R M
R D R D
A 8 A 9
9
8
R M R M
R D R D
R
D
A 5 A 6
A
4
5
4
6
R
UNITS
NEVER
EQUIPPED
Fig. 58. Layout of max 8 channels in double polarization configurations
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
d)
ED
in the unused slots, dummy plates mus be equipped to ensure EMC performance as well as
equipment correct ventilation;
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
130 / 514

2)

3.5.2 Channel provisioning/expansion guideline

9600 LSY is a fully expansible radio system. It means that, starting from the minimum 1+1 / 2+0
configuration, it is possible to increase the traffic capacity adding to the station the units necessary to
increase the number of radio channels up to the maximum allowed by the configuration.
Hereafter the expansion procedure is reported with the help of some figures illustrating the slots to be used
to house the added transceivers inside the mechanical assembly. Please, keep in mind that for the
RRA/modem units the same procedure is still valid; it means that the Base Band shelfs slots
corresponding to those utilized for the transceiver will host the associated RRA/modem units. In this way
the connections between transceivers and relevant modem units is realized by vertical parallel coaxial
cables, without cable crossconnections.
a)
If the branching unit utilizes a single polarization, the transceivers and the branching unit will be
added using the slots starting from left and going toward the right side of the subrack, as shown in
the next Fig. 59.
The maximum channel number depends on the channel plan. In every case the maximum number
of transceiver that can be housed in the subrack is 8.
The slot used for the protection transceiver (slot 1) is fixed and it is the first on the left of the subrack.
The example reported in the figure is limited to 4 channels.
1+1/2+0 configuration
expansion to 2+1/3+0
H (V)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 59. Single polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
131 / 514
If the branching unit utilizes two antenna polarizations , the transceivers and the branching unit
will be added installing them stating from the side walls and filling the subrack going toward the
subrack centre, in position left or right depending on the polarization of each transceiver, as shown
in the next figure.
The slot used for the protection transceiver (slot 1) is fixed and it is the first on the left of the subrack.
So, the antenna polarization of the radio channel used for protection (H or V) defines which branching
(H or V) will be installed at the left side of the rack. For the above reason, it is important to keep
in mind that H or V positions are not strictly associated to the left or right side of the subrack.
The maximum channel number depends on the channel plan.
The example reported in Fig. 60. is limited to 4 channels. It refers to a system with spare channel on
H antenna polarization and, consequently, with transceivers and branching connected to H
polarization on the left side of the subrack.
(adding 1 RT on V pol)
(adding 1 RT on H pol)
2 4
V V
H
2
2
1
4
1
4
5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 60. Two polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with the H channels
on the left side
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
132 / 514

b)

c)
The next Fig. 61. shows the other possibility, in which the spare channel (2) utilizes the V polarization
and, consequently, the transceivers and branching are connected to V polarization and are
installed on the left side of the subrack.
(1 RT on H pol and
1 RT on V pol)
Fig. 61. 2 polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with V channel on the
left side
The above figure shows only two of the possible expansions that depend on the mixing of (H) and
(V) transceivers that must be utilized.
d)
The next Fig. 62. gives an example of the installation of the units in case of frequency reuse
technique utilization in a 7+1 protected terminal. At first, the terminal utilizes the first 4 channels (with
channel 4 V as spare channel). The successive expansion of the system is performed adding the
channels working on the same frequencies but transmitted on the opposite antenna polarization.
1 3
4 2
3 1
V V
H H
H H
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 62. Expansion procedure with reused channels
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
133 / 514
3.6 Base Band shelf
SUBD CONNECTORS
2MB WST CONNECTORS
ACCESS
AREA
BOARD
EQUIPMENT
AREA
Fig. 63. Unequipped Base Band shelf layout

The board equipment area is described in para.3.6.1 on page 135.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The access area is described in:
para.4.2.2 on page 178 as far as SUBD connector area is concerned
para.4.2.3 on page 180 as far as 2Mbit/s WST connector area is concerned
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
134 / 514

The following Fig. 63. shows the boardunequipped shelf layout.
3.6.1 Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules

Please refer to para.3.5 on page 129, for Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves
2 3
S
Y
S
C
O
S
E
R
V
R
R
A
0
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
R
M
R
D
A
0
1
M
D
1
R
M
R
D
A
2
2
R
M
R
D
A
3
3
R
M
R
D
A
4
4
R M
R D
A 5
5
R
R
A
6
M
D
6
R M
R D
A 7
7
R M
R D
A 8
8
R M
R D
A 9
9
B
P
S
F
1
F
24 25
P
S
U
0
E
P
S
U
1
E
P
S
U
2
E
P
S
U
3
E
P
S
U
4
E
P
S
U
5
E
P
S
U
6
E
P
S
U
7
E
P
S
U
8
E
P
S
U
9
E
P
S
F
2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Fig. 64. Base Band shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For:
slot (A) equipment, refer to para.3.6.1.1 on page 136
slot (B) equipment, refer to para.3.6.1.3 on page 136
slots (C) + (G) + (D) + (E) equipment, refer to para.3.6.1.4 on page 136
slot (F) equipment, refer to para.3.6.1.5 on page 139.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
135 / 514
3.6.1.1 System Controller card
SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 64. on page 135)

The SYStem COntroller (SYSCO) card contains the subunit ESCON (in its turn, housing
the equipment configuration data memory device FLASH CARD) and the external
connectors for the QB3 and F interfaces.
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
SYSCO
[25]
SYSCO
FLASH CARD
[27] or [26] in alternative
MEMDEV
(A)
N.B.
Refer to para.3.6.2 on page 140 for the unit physical views and operative information.
3.6.1.2 Additional Housekeeping unit

Tab. 17. Additional Housekeeping unit equipping rules
POSITION IN OPTINEX RACK (see Fig. 55. on page 126)
The Additional Housekeeping unit is an optional module to expand the number of
housekeeping (up to 40 input contacts in all).
(C)
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
[28]
HKDEV
ADDITIONAL
HOUSEKEEPING
N.B.
3.6.1.3 Service card

Tab. 18. Service card equipping rules
The SERVice (SERV) card contains the auxiliary AUX/EOW service channels, the
protection of the WST channels and the service channels, the switch logic of the RPS
protection (used only in case of 1+1 and N+1 configurations) and it can host (as option) a
module (TPHDEV), adding a voice channel.
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
SERV
[23]
SERV
ADDITIONAL VOICE
[24]
TPHDEV
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(B)
N.B.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
136 / 514

Tab. 16. System Controller card equipping rules
3.6.1.4 RRA, MD and PSU card groups and dummy plates

a)
RRA
Tab. 19. RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY cards equipping rules

(C)
and
(G)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
Read carefully General equipping rules on page 129.

The RRA units are connected to the transmission line through one optical or electrical
interface. The electrical interface is placed directly on RRA units, instead the optical one
on a optical module placed inside the RRA unit itself (a drawer into the front panel).
Slot 3 of Base Band shelf can be used as a standby radio channel in N+1 and 1+1
configurations; otherwise it is used as a main radio channel in N+0 configuration. In N+1
and 1+1 configurations, this slot can be equipped by a RRAS (RRA standby) unit and only
in N+1, the same interface previously described for the RRA (optical) can be provided, if
extra traffic is actuated; in N+0 configuration, this slot can be equipped by a RRA unit, in
this case the optical interface module can be provided.
Just one physical RRA unit exists both for transmission of STM1 signal or subSTM1 one.
The same thing is applied to the RRAS unit.
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
RRA CHANNEL
all slots (C)
[17]
RRA
RRA STANDBY
slot (G) only
[18]
RRAS
S1.1 OPTIC.
INTER.FC/PC
[31]
IS1.1
S1.1 OPTIC.
INTER.SC/PC
[32]
IS1.1
For the unit physical views and operative information, refer to para.3.6.4 on page 147 for the
RRACHANNEL, and to para.3.6.5 on page 149 for the RRASTANDBY.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
137 / 514
b)
MD

The MoDem (MD) card types contain the modulator and demodulator function units. Only
128 QAM is supported in the current release. For each type of MD (supporting STM1 or
sub STM1 signal), an IF module is used in case of space diversity configuration as
daughter board of the MD board. The same physical module is used also in case of
frequency reuse configuration, always as a daughter board, but only for MD supporting
STM1 signals. In case of space diversity with frequency reuse configuration with MD
supporting STM1 signals, two of these daughter boards are used.
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
MODEM LHSTM11WST
[20]
RRAMD1280W0
CANCCOMB STM1
[21]
IF1WCX
MODEM LHSTM00WST
[19]
RRAMD1281W1
CANCCOMB STM0
[22]
IF0WC
(D)
N.B.
c)
PSU
Tab. 21. PSU cards equipping rules

The PSU boards power the Base Band shelf. Usually PSU units are equipped in pairs
(PSU0 + PSU1, PSU2 + PSU3, etc.), because each PSU pair gives power supply in
protected mode to a pair of MD and RRA, that are so protected from the failure of a single
PSU:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(E)
N.B.
ED
PSU0 + PSU1
PSU2 + PSU3
PSU4 + PSU5
PSU6 + PSU7
PSU8 + PSU9
(MD0+RRA0) + (MD1+RRA1)
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
DC/DC CONVERTER
BB 2G LH
[29]
PSL4860
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
138 / 514

Tab. 20. Modem cards equipping rules
d)
Dummy plates

Tab. 22. Dummy plates for RRAModem and PSU equipping rules
When a group of RRA, MD and PSU is not equipped, the corresponding slots must be
closed by dummy plates, to ensure EMC performance as well as equipment correct
ventilation.
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
(C)
+
(D)
DUMMY PLATE W40

(RRA + MD)
[34]
(E)
DUMMY PLATE L40

(DC/DC CONV.)
[35]
3.6.1.5 PSF cards

Tab. 23. PSF cards equipping rules
The PSF boards contain the filter for the PSU boards and the DC/DC converter to supply
System Controller and SERVICE boards; the two PSF boards are in protection between
them.
(F)
N.B.
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
FILTER P.S.U. 5.3/3.4V
[30]
PSF
3.6.1.6 Kit Loudspeaker

Tab. 24. Kit Loudspeaker equipping rules
POSITION IN OPTINEX RACK (see Fig. 55. on page 126)
The Kit Loudspeaker is an optional unit to be inserted inside TRU. The kit includes the cable
for its connection to the system.
(J)
UNIT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
KIT LOUDSPEAKER
N.B.
ED
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
[38]
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
139 / 514
Refer to:
para.2.4.4.7 on page 57 for a brief functional description of the unit
para.3.6.1.1 on page 136 for physical composition and P/Ns.
chapter 5, and in particular:
para.5.2.6 on page 276, for the detailed functional description of the SYSCO unit
para.5.2.7 on page 280, for the detailed functional description of the Flash Card
The following information is given hereafter:
Fig. 65. herebelow shows the unit assembly view
Fig. 66. herebelow shows the FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
Fig. 67. on page 141 depicts the unit front view :
for the front connectors usage, please refer to para.4.7.6 on page 207.
the usage of the pushbuttons Lamp Test (7) and Reset (9), is explained in para.4.7.6 on page
207, and in chapter 7 on page 355.
the usage of the other pushbuttons and leds is explained in chapter 7 on page 355.
para.3.6.2.2 on page 142 describes the hardware setting options dependent on SWP and system
configuration.
Subunit
ESCON
J1
J2
J3
M1
Flash Card
M2
System Controller
main board (ESC)
M3
Fig. 65. System Controller assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view
TOP SIDE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
INSERTION
Fig. 66. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
140 / 514

3.6.2 SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit operative information

(9) Reset Button

J1
J2
M1
J3
I/O for
QB3 10 BASE 2
(2 BNCs in parallel)
I/O RJ45 for

QB3 10 BASE T
and DEBUGN or
local EC debug
I/O RJ45 for
CAN 0 BB and
local EC debug
M3
M2
F interface
for ECT
(1) OR of all URGENT alarms (red)

(2) OR of all NOT URGENT alarms (red)
(3) ATTENDED alarm (yellow)
(4) OR of all ABNORMAL conditions (yellow)
(5) OR of all INDICATIVE alarms (yellow)
(7) Lamp Test Pushbutton
(8) Alarm storing Pushbutton
(Attended)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(6) bicolor led:

red on: Card failure alarm
green flashing: SW download in progress (internal or toward other boards)
off: normal condition
Fig. 67. System Controller front view
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
141 / 514
With reference to Fig. 67. on page 141, the pushbuttons Lamp Test (7) and Reset (9) allow the following
operations:
Lamp test
Reset
Effect
System lamp test of all the leds in all units of Baseband shelf
(Transceivers not affected)
EC (Equipment Controller) reset
RC (Radio Controller) reset

N.B. to perform this operation, hold Lamp Test pushed and
contemporarily push Reset
For the meaning of EC and RC, make reference to para.5.2.2.1.2 on page 237.
3.6.2.2 Hardware settings

Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the System Controller unit for the TC and DipSwitch physical
position on the board (see Tab. 89. on page 510).
In the following, only the DipSwitch banks associated to software configurations are taken into
consideration (for other DipSwitch banks and TC meaning, please refer to the above cited documents).
a)
on subunit ESCON (see Fig. 65. on page 140) :

a Dipswitch bank allows to clear (erase) the System Configuration memory. The use of this
dipswitch bank is explained in the 9600LSY Operators Handbook.
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
These dipswitches must be usually in OFF position.
If unproperly set, these dipswitches will reset the FLASH CARD content, and you will loose all the
software herein contained (programs and system configuration data)
b)
on main board ESC (see Fig. 65. on page 140) :

1)
Equipment Type:
EQTYPE field is fixed to 0110 (Dec. 6) to indicate Long Haul system (there are no Dipswitch
banks to set).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
continues..
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
142 / 514

3.6.2.1 Lamp Test & Reset buttons

N.B.
Before using Tab. 25. or Tab. 26. for configuration setting/change purposes, verify that
the values correspond to those stated in the CT Operators Handbook associated to the
Software Package (SWP) running on your system. In the case of conflict between the
values stated in this manual and those indicated in CT Operators Handbook, these latter
will prevail.
2)
BKPV (BacKPanel Version) field

according to following Tab. 25.
Tab. 25. ESC DipSwitch Bank I4 setting

BKPV
I4 switches
Dec
Description
LHRC Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Compact
LHR Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator
LHRR Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Repeater
DipSwitch I4 /45678 must be set to 1 (Open or Off).
3)
SLOTID field for LHR

according to following Tab. 26.
Tab. 26. ESC DipSwitch Bank I1 setting

SLOTID
I1 switches
Dec
Equip.
Type
Subrack
BB
Subrack TRI
STM0/
STM1
Space
Diversity
STM0
SRTRI1HET
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
2
1+1
HET
STM1
SRBB11
STM0
SD
STM1
SD
SRTRISD1HET
0
STM0
SRTRIN
STM1
N+1
SRBBN1
STM0
SD
STM1
SD
SRTRISDN
0
STM0
SRTRIN
STM1
N+0
SRBBN0
10
STM0
SD
STM1
SD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SRTRISDN
0
11
DipSwitch I1 /78 must be set to 1 (Open or Off).
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
143 / 514
Refer to:
chapter 5, and in particular para.5.4.6 on page 297, for the detailed functional description of the unit
Fig. 68. herebelow shows the unit assembly view
Fig. 69. on page 145 depicts the unit front view :
for the front connectors (J1) (J2) usage, please refer to para.4.7.4 on page 202.
the usage of the front connector (J5) and leds in LINE O.W. area is explained in para.3.6.3.1
on page 146.
the usage of leds in LINE TPH area is explained in para.3.6.3.2 on page 146.
the led (3) and pushbutton (4) are presently unused.
the other indications are selfexplaining.
para.3.6.3.3 on page 146 describes the hardware setting options.

Optional subunit
ADDITIONAL VOICE
(TPHDEV)
J1
J2
J3
J4
SMA
J5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 68. Service unit assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
144 / 514

3.6.3 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit operative information

J1
PROTECTED
WST 2 Mbit/s
J2
J3
NOT OPERATIVE IN
CURRENT RELEASE
J4
(1) Indication of the No
of the Rx
protected channel
(1 digit display)
(2) Manual operation
of N+1 logic
(yellow)
J5
(6) line busy (yellow)

(7) line free (green)
Telephone jack
(8) line busy (yellow) (*)

(9) line free (green) (*)
(*)
(3) Loudspeaker
activated (green)
operative only
with TPHDEV
equipped
(4) Pushbutton for

loudspeaker
activation/deactivation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(10) Card failure alarm (red)
Fig. 69. Service unit front view
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
145 / 514
After having connected the DTMF Telephone Kit (Ref.[39] in Tab. 13. on page 122) to the telephone
jack (connector (J5) in Fig. 69. on page 145), the User can implement two call modes:
selective
omnibus
activates a twoway speech link between two users

activates a oneway link with all users
The User number, within a 10 to 99 range, is software programmable.

To make an omnibus call, digit 00.
Front LED indications (LINE O.W. area in Fig. 69. on page 145):
(7) (green) on:

(6) (yellow):
free line
on:
flashing:
engaged line
call received and acknowledged
Keys on telephone handset:
* : forced line release

# : line seizure
Three PartyLine (VF TX/RX A,B and C) paths are available on BB shelfs connector M190 (see
3.6.3.2 TPH Channel use (Additional Voice)

It is possible only with subunit TPH equipped inside SERVICE board.
The DTMF Telephone Kit (Ref.[39] in Tab. 13. on page 122) must be connected to the system through
pins 7 and 20 of BB shelfs connector M190 (see Tab. 43. on page 205).
The call procedure is equal to that explained in para.3.6.3.1 above but, in this case, the leds in LINE
TPH area are used instead.
Two PartyLine (VF TX/RX A and B TPH) paths are available on BB shelfs connector M190 (see
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the Service unit for the TC and DipSwitch physical position
on the board and their meaning (see Tab. 89. on page 510).
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
146 / 514

3.6.3.1 EOW Channel use

3.6.4 RRACHANNEL unit operative information

Refer to:
point a ) on page 137 for physical composition and P/Ns.
chapter 5, and in particular:
para.5.4.2 on page 287, for the detailed functional description of the unit
para.5.4.4 on page 292, for the detailed functional description of the optical module
The following Fig. 70. shows:
the protection cap (fixed by a screw) that must be removed to access the unit front panel, and must
be repositioned after having connected the cables
the drawer (fixed by two screws) that must be removed only in case an optional a STM1 optical
module has to be equipped.
J1
J2
Protection cap
Drawer extractable for the insertion of a STM1 optical module

Fig. 70. RRACHANNEL assembly view and front connector numbering
3.6.4.1 Front connectors usage
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to para.4.7.2 on page 202.

Other information in Fig. 71. on page 148.
None
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
147 / 514

STM1
ELECTR.
INTRF.
J1
yellow marker
INPUT
OUTPUT
green marker
Hole for drawer

extraction
(present also in
optical modules)
J2
ALS restart key

SC/PC
OPTIONAL
STM1 OPTICAL
MODULE
INPUT
OUTPUT
ALS restart key

FC/PC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 71. RRACHANNEL unit front view
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
148 / 514

3.6.5 RRASTANDBY unit operative information

Refer to:
point a ) on page 137 for physical composition and P/Ns.
As far as the protection cap and extractable drawer are concerned, the assembly view is as in Fig. 70. on
page 147.
The front view is as in Fig. 71. on page 148, with a difference in the lower part, where there is the display
shown in Fig. 72. herebelow:
Indication of the No
of the Tx protected channel
(1 digit display)
Tx
Fig. 72. RRASTANDBY unit front view (particular)

Refer to para.4.7.2 on page 202.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
None
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
149 / 514
Refer to:
point b ) on page 138 for physical composition and P/Ns.
The following Fig. 73. shows the protection cap (fixed by a screw) that must be removed to access the unit
front panel, and must be repositioned after having connected the cables:
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
MODEM
mother
board
Protection cap
Fig. 73. Modem unit assembly view and front connector numbering
Refer to para.4.6 on page 193.
Other information in Fig. 74. on page 151 and Fig. 75. on page 152.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

They are on the mother board. Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the Modem unit for the
TC and DipSwitch physical position on the board and their meaning (choosing the unit type
according to the P/N in Tab. 89. on page 510. WARNING: there are different Modem units).
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
150 / 514

3.6.6 MODEM unit operative information

The following Fig. 74. :
depicts the internal connections between IF2 and IF3 inputs and the corresponding CANCCOMB
submodules
describes the equipping rules of CANCCOMB submodules in the various configurations.
POS.A
IF INPUT MAIN
IF2 INPUT
POS.B
IF3 INPUT
STM0 CASE
CONFIGURATION
NO SPACE DIVERSITY
SPACE DIVERSITY
POS.A
POS.B
UNEQUIPPED
UNEQUIPPED
CANCCOMB STM0
UNEQUIPPED
N.B. : XPIC not envisaged with STM0
STM1 CASE
CONFIGURATION
POS.A
POS.B
UNEQUIPPED
UNEQUIPPED
SPACE DIVERSITY OR XPIC
CANCCOMB STM1
UNEQUIPPED
SPACE DIVERSITY AND XPIC
CANCCOMB STM1
CANCCOMB STM1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NO SPACE DIVERSITY AND NO XPIC
Fig. 74. Modem unit assembly internal view and CANCCOMB equipping rules
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
151 / 514

Modulator output
J1
blue marker
Modulator output monitoring
Main demodulator input
J2
J3
red marker
IF2 input
J4
see Fig. 74.

on page 151
IF3 input
J5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 75. Modem unit front view
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
152 / 514
3.6.7 PSU and PSF units operative information
para.2.4.4.9 on page 57 for a brief functional description of the PSU unit

point c ) on page 138 for physical composition and P/Ns of the PSU unit
para.2.4.4.10 on page 57 for a brief functional description of the PSF unit

para.3.6.1.5 on page 139 for physical composition and P/Ns of the PSF unit
chapter 5, and in particular para.5.3 on page 282, for the detailed functional description of the units
A3

Refer to:
(1) ON/OFF
switch
(3) Input
Power
Supply
A1
(2) PSU switched

on
(green)
(4) PSF powered

on
(green)
PSF
PSU
3.6.7.1 Power supply connector pinout (on PSF unit)
Pins
Meaning
A1
+BATT
+BATTERY
A2
GND
Ground
A3
BATT
Battery
Fig. 76. PSU and PSF units front view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3.6.7.2 Front connector on PSF unit usage

Refer to Tab. 33. on page 190.
None
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
153 / 514
Refer to:
M1
M2
(1) LED
Fig. 77. Additional Housekeeping unit assembly view
3.6.8.1 Legend and connectors usage
a)
(M1) SUBD25 pins female connector pinout: see Tab. 52. on page 213.
b)
(M2) SUBD9 pins male connector: see Tab. 40. on page 192.
c)
LED (red): indicates the failure of Additional Housekeeping unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
None
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
154 / 514

3.6.8 Additional Housekeeping unit operative information
3.6.9 Kit Loudspeaker operative information

3.6.9.1 Installation
The Kit Loudspeaker is an optional unit to be inserted inside TRU and connected to the system as depicted
in Fig. 78. herebelow.
Refer to para.3.6.1.6 on page 139 for physical composition and P/Ns.
To equip the Kit, remove the TRU

plate (4 screws) and fix the kit
with the same screws
To be connected to
BB connector M190
(see Fig. 95. on page 178)
Fig. 78. Kit Loudspeaker

None
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3.6.9.3 Usage
With reference to Fig. 69. on page 145 (Service unit front view):
Pushbutton (4) activates/deactivates the loudspeaker
Green led (3) on indicates the loudspeaker activation.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
155 / 514
3.7 Transceiver shelf

3.7.1 Transceiver shelf unit layout

The Transceiver shelf unit layout is depicted in the following Fig. 79. herebelow:
T
R
I
3
T
R
I
0
T
R
I
1
T
R
I
2
T
R
I
4
T
R
I
5
T
R
I
6
T
R
I
7
T
R
I
8
T
R
I
9
10
Fig. 79. Transceiver shelf equipment (slot numbering and board types and numbering)
General equipping rules
Please refer to para.3.5 on page 129, for Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves.
3.7.2 Equipping rules of Transceiver units or substitutive Dummy Plates

Tab. 27. Transceiver units and substitutive dummy plates equipping rules
SLOT IN TRANSCEIVER SHELF (see Fig. 79. on page 156)
TRANSCEIVER
Each Transceiver is an assembly made up by components that, from item provisioning and
maintenance points of view, are independent items that are equipped, for types and
number, according to the system configuration, as shown herebelow:
COMPONENTS TYPES AND NUMBER
FREQUENCY
DIVERSITY
TRI
LO
R
FR KIT
REUSE
N
N
1
2
1
0
N
Y
1
2
1
1 or 0
Y
N
1
2
2
0
Y
Y
1
2
2
1 or 0
Refer to para.3.7.3 on page 157 for details.
(A)
N.B.
For the P/Ns and Remote Inventory Labels of TRI units and modules, please
refer to the specific chapter between those listed in Tab. 67. on page 414.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DUMMY PLATE
When a transceiver is not equipped, the corresponding slot is closed by a dummy plate.
Label for
P/N
Remote
UNIT
Inventory
RT FRONT PLATE KIT
[36]
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
156 / 514
3.7.3 Composition of transceiver units

a)
TRI (Tranceiver)
The transceiver units have different P/Ns for the following characteristics (N.B.):
frequency range
modulation (128 QAM, 64 QAM)

This P/N is comprehensive of the Transceiver box (see Fig. 80. on page 158) and the following
internal components (see Fig. 81. on page 159):
RT control
Amplifier
Up Converter
Delay Line
DC/DC Converter
together with the associated internal cabling and the cabling relevant to the connection of Rx and Tx
LOs.
This P/N does not include the LO, R and FR KIT components, that are defined as separate items.
b)
LO (Local Oscillator module)

There are always two Local Oscillators modules inside a transceiver, one for the Rx section, the other
for the Tx section (see Fig. 81. on page 159).
The Local Oscillator modules have different P/Ns for the following characteristics (N.B.):
frequency range
possible application for a particular channel plan

Inside a TRI, these Local Oscillators must have the same P/N.
c)
R (Receiver module)
There can be one or two receiver modules inside a transceiver:
in the case the Transceiver is used without the Space Diversity configuration, there is only one
Receiver (named Main Receiver) as shown in Fig. 81. on page 159 and Fig. 82. on page 160,
and the unit front connectors are those depicted in Fig. 87. on page 165;
in the case the Transceiver is used with the Space Diversity configuration, two Receivers
(respectively named Main Receiver and Diversity Receiver) are equipped as shown in
Fig. 83. on page 160 and Fig. 84. on page 161, and the unit front connectors are those depicted
in Fig. 88. on page 166.
The Receiver Modules have different P/Ns for the following characteristics (N.B.):
frequency range
The Receiver P/N includes the associated internal cabling.
Inside a TRI, the Main Receiver and Diversity Receiver must have the same P/N.
d)
FR KIT (Frequency Reuse kit)

Only in case of Frequency Reuse systems:
one Frequency Reuse kit is equipped inside the transceiver housing the Rx Local Oscillator
defined as Master, as depicted in Fig. 82. on page 160 and Fig. 84. on page 161.
inside the transceiver housing the Rx Local Oscillator defined as Slave, the Frequency Reuse
kit is not equipped .
The Frequency Reuse kit has the same P/N for all frequency bands.
The Frequency Reuse kit P/N includes the module and the associated internal cabling.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
The P/Ns of TRI units and modules must belong to the same Frequency Plan group: please refer
to the specific chapter between those listed in Tab. 67. on page 414.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
157 / 514
3.7.4 TRANSCEIVER unit operative information
Assembly views
Internal composition
Hardware settings
Internal interconnection diagram
Front connectors usage

Refer to:
previous para.3.7.2 and 3.7.3 for physical composition and P/Ns.
herebelow
on page 159
on page 161
on page 162
on page 165
3.7.4.1 Assembly views
COVER PLATE A TO
REMOVE FOR
INTERNAL SERVICE
(HARDWARE SETTING
OR REPAIR).
Arrows show screws
for cover remove/fix.
COVER PLATE B
NEVER TO
BE REMOVED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TRI P/N and Remote Inventory
Fig. 80. Transceiver assembly physical views
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
158 / 514
3.7.4.2 Internal composition

FREQUENCY REUSE
INTERNAL COMPONENTS

DIVERSITY
USAGE
TR HOUSING
LO MASTER
Y
LO SLAVE
N
Y
Fig. 81. herebelow

Fig. 82. on page 160, in addition to those shown in Fig. 81.
Fig. 81. herebelow
LO MASTER
LO SLAVE
MAIN RECEIVER
PLATE COVERING
MAIN RECEIVER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DC/DC CONVERTER
RX LOCAL
OSCILLATOR
TX LOCAL
OSCILLATOR
RT CONTROL
DELAY LINE
UP CONVERTER
AMPLIFIER
Fig. 81. Transceiver internal view: standard components and Main Receiver
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
159 / 514

TR.FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
Fig. 82. Transceiver internal view: without Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit
DIVERSITY RECEIVER
MAIN RECEIVER
(inside)
N.B.
The Diversity Receiver is mounted on the PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER (see
Fig. 81. page 159)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 83. Transceiver internal view: with Diversity Receiver and without TR.Frequency Reuse Kit
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
160 / 514
TR.FREQUENCY REUSE KIT

DIVERSITY RECEIVER
MAIN RECEIVER
(inside)
N.B.
The Diversity Receiver is mounted on the PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER (see
Fig. 81. page 159)
Fig. 84. Transceiver internal view: with Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
They are on subunit RT CONTROL (see Fig. 85. herebelow) and are accessible removing the
cover plate A depicted in Fig. 80. on page 158. Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the
Transceiver unit for the TC and DipSwitch physical position on the board and their meaning
(choosing the unit type according to the P/N in Tab. 89. on page 510. WARNING: there are
different Transceiver units).
HARDWARE SETTING DIP SWITCHES

Fig. 85. Position of Hardware setting dip switches
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
161 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
N.B.
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514

3.7.4.4 Internal interconnection diagram
Letters denote particulars enlarged on following pages
Fig. 86. Transceiver internal connection diagram
03
162 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
continues ..
Enlarged particulars of Fig. 86. page 162
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
163 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.292 Q
.. continues
Enlarged particulars of Fig. 86. page 162
03
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
164 / 514

DIVERSITY
N
Fig. 87. herebelow
Fig. 88. on page 166
Y or N
N.B.
DESCRIPTION
Fig. 89. on page 167 (meaning of access points)
For connection with Modem and Branching, refer to para.4.6 on page 193.
J9
J10
J11
J12
M2
J5
I1
J6
J7
J8
J13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
J14
Fig. 87. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR without Rx diversity)
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
165 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
J1
ED
J2
J10
J3
J11
J4
J12
M1
M2
J5
I1
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514

J9
J6
J7
J8
J13
J14
Fig. 88. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR with Rx diversity)
03
166 / 514
Rx diversity
section N.B.1
J1
J2
J3
J4
Input RF Rx diversity
Rx main
section
Input RF Rx main
J9
Output 1 IF Rx divers.
red marker
Output 1 IF Rx main J10
Output 2 IF Rx divers.
Output 2 IF Rx main J11
Output IF Rx divers.
monitoring
M1
Output IF Rx main
monitoring
N.B.2
N.B.2
blue marker
J5
M2
ON/OFF switch
I1
Input IF Tx
(1) Unit switched on
(green)
LO Rx Remote
(Input or Output)
J6
J12
J7 LO Rx monitoring
(2) OR of internal alarms
(red)
J8 LO Tx monitoring
N.B.1 Rx diversity sections elements are

present only in units equipped with Rx
diversity (see Fig. 88. on page 166)
N.B.2 Socket to connect a recording instrument,
to monitor the Rx input field value
RF Tx output
monitoring
J13
RF Tx output
J14
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 89. Transceiver front view meaning of access points
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
167 / 514
3.8.1 Branching drawings and BranchingTransceivers connections

Branching drawings, organized per frequency bands and type (with/without Frequency Reuse/Diversity)
are given as separate documents annexed to this handbook.
Their list is given in Tab. 91. on page 513.
These drawings indicate also the connections among the branching and the Transceivers.
As far as the number of channels are concerned, such drawings show only some of the possible
configurations.
3.8.2 Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area)

Tab. 28. Branching Front Plate Kit equipping rules
SLOT IN OPTINEX RACK (see Fig. 55. on page 126)
BRANCHING FRONT PLATE KIT

Equipping this kit, after having set up the connections involved in Rx branching area, is
mandatory in operating conditions to ensure correct equipment ventilation.
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
BRANCHING FRONT PLATE

KIT
[33]
(F)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 90. Branching Front Plate Kit
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
168 / 514

3.8 Branching

3.9 FANS shelf and FANS assembled units

3.9.1 FANS shelf equipping rules
Presently, there can be either one or two FAN shelves, see pos. (E) and (L) in Fig. 55. on page 126:
FAN shelf pos. (E) is mandatory in all configurations
FAN shelf pos. (L) is mandatory whenever the 1650SMC shelf is equipped.
3.9.2 FANS assembled unit equipping rules

The FANS SHELF contains one or two independent FANS ASSEMBLED units, as depicted in following
Fig. 91. :
FANSL
A
FANSL
B
Fig. 91. Fan shelf (slot numbering and board types)

Tab. 29. Fans unit & cover equipping rules
SLOT IN FAN SHELF (see Fig. 91. on this page)
Each fan unit contains four fans, a DC/DC converter and an internal control unit.
When one of the FANS ASSEMBLED is not equipped, the corresponding slot must be
closed by COVER to guarantee correct ventilation.
For FANS ASSEMBLED equipping rules, refer to:
para.3.9.2.1 on page 170 (Base Band shelf)
para.3.9.2.2 on page 170 (ADM shelf)
(A)
(B)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
FANS ASSEMBLED
[8]
FANSL
COVER
[37]
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
169 / 514
3.9.2.1 Equipping rules for FANS assembled unit in Basebandshelf
E=
NE =
equipped
not equipped
POLARIZATION
single polarization
two antenna polarizations
CONFIGURATION
FANSLA
FANSLB
up to
2+1 / 3+0
NE
3+1 / 4+0
all
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
As far as the ADMshelfs FANSshelf is concerned, only one FAN ASSEMBLED unit is envisaged
(FANSL B, on the rack right side).
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
170 / 514

Tab. 30. Equipping rules for FANS assembled unit in Basebandshelf

3.9.3 FANS assembled unit operative information

Fig. 92. herebelow and Fig. 93. on page 172 show the physical views of the FANS shelf and FANSL unit
and substitutive COVER assemblies.
FANS SHELF
FRONT PLATE
COVER
(must be equipped in not used
FANS ASSEMBLED slots to
guarantee correct ventilation)
FANS ASSEMBLED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 92. FANS SHELF, FANS ASSEMBLED and substitutive COVER assembly views
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
171 / 514

Hole for unit extraction
(1) LED
Can Bus
Connector
M3
M1
Power supply input
DIPSWITCH
I
O
O
I
M2
Can Bus
Connector
I1
I2
Power supply input
M4
Legend on page 173

Fig. 93. Front view of FANS SHELF equipped with both FANS ASSEMBLED units
Hardware settings
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
see point c ) on page 173
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
172 / 514
Legend for Fig. 93. :

a)
(M1) (M4) Power supply connectors :
Usage and connection: see:
Tab. 34. on page 190 (Basebandshelfs FANSshelf)
Tab. 35. on page 190 (ADMshelfs FANSshelf)
Pinout:
Pins
b)
c)
d)
ED
Meaning
A1
+BATT
+BATTERY
A2
GND
Ground
A3
BATT
Battery
(M2) (M3) CANBUS connectors:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
see Tab. 38. on page 191
(I1) (I2) DIPSWITCHES : to be set according to the position in the rack:

I1
I2
Subrack No
Usage
Baseband shelf
future use
ADM shelf
future use
LED (red): indicating a failure in the FANS ASSEMBLED unit
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
173 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
174 / 514

4 SYSTEM CABLING
4.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the 9600LSY system cabling with the following information:
location of access points for cabling, with the exception of those present on the units front plates,
that are described in the paragraphs of previous chapter.
types of cables used for internal connections
pointtopoint cabling of internal connections
description of pinout of connectors for external connections.

This paragraph does not describe:
the internal connections effective cable routing inside the equipment
the kinds of cables used for external connections
For this information, please refer to the Installation Handbook (REF.[E] on page 469).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This chapter is organized as follows:
Shelves connectors, on page 176, including:
T.R.U. connectors, on page 176
Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout, on page 178
Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connectors layout, on page 180
Transceiver shelf connectors, on page 181
Cable kits and cable types, on page 183
Power supply distribution connections, on page 190
Signal connections between shelves, on page 191
ModemTransceiverBranching connections, on page 193
External interfaces, on page 202, including:
Power Line Interface, on page 202
SDH interfaces, on page 202
Input / Output Unprotected WST, on page 202
Input / Output Protected WST, on page 202
Auxiliary Channels, on page 203
Management interfaces, on page 207
Station Alarms, on page 208
Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms, on page 208, including:
General characteristics, on page 208
Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms, on page 209
Input Housekeeping alarms, on page 212
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
175 / 514
4.2 Shelves connectors
M4
M6
M8
M7
M5
4A
2A
Box TRU
1A
M1
Front view
6A
5A
3A
M2
M3
Alarm Extension

4.2.1 T.R.U. connectors
2B
1B
3B
4B
6B
5B
T.R.U.
Front view
M9
T.R.U.
Rear view
DC input and distribution

M10
b+
b+
a+
a
a+
Rear view without cover
Legend on page 177
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 94. Top Rack Unit connector numbering
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
176 / 514

a)
(a) (a+) (b) (b+) (a) (a+) (b) (b+) :

Primary BATT.A and BATT.B. Power Supply input and distribution frame (N.B.)
b)
(M7) :
for usage see Tab. 37. on page 191; pins connected in parallel to connector (M8)
c)
(M6) :
for usage see Tab. 39. on page 192; pins connected in parallel to connector (M8)
d)
(M1) to (M5) and (M10) :

RM Interface connections; pins connected in parallel to connector (M8)
e)
(M9) :
Power Supply, alarm and service connections (N.B.)
f)
(1A) to (6B) :
Output Power Supply connectors/breakers toward the user shelves indicated in Tab. 15. on page
128.
For the physical connection from connector/breakers to the user shelves, make reference to para.4.4
on page 190.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
For further information on TRU unit (in particular for hardware presettings), please refer to
OPTINEX rack specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.1 on page 471).
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
177 / 514

4.2.2 Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout
M179 M180
M194
M187
M185 M193
M183
M186
M192
M190
M191 M182
M188 M184
M189
Legend: see Tab. 31. on page 179

N.B.
Dot in connector front view indicates Pin 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 95. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
178 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tab. 31. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors usage
CONN. CONN. TYPE
SIGNALS
USAGE
Can 0 B.B Terminator

M179
ED
see Fig. 104. on page 189

or
SUBD9 pins female

Additional Housekeeping
M180
SUBD25 pins female
Can Bus RT
M182
SUBD25 pins female
Aux channel G703 and RS232
see Tab. 41. on page 203 and

Tab. 42. on page 204
M183
SUBD25 pins female
Out Remote alarms

(GA21GA40)
M184
SUBD9 pins male
Rack lamps
M185
SUBD25 pins female
Input Housekeeping
M186
SUBD25 pins female
RT missing connections
M187
SUBD9 pins female
Can 0 bus extension toward

FAN Shelf 0
M188
SUBD9 pins female
CAN 1 (Download) Terminator
M189
SUBD9 pins female
CAN 1 (Download) Terminator
M190
SUBD25 pins female
Out party line OW,TPH and

loudspeaker

M191
SUBD25 pins female
Aux channel V11

M192
SUBD25 pins female
Out Housekeeping and

Remote alarms (GA41GA48)
M193
SUBD25 pins female
Out Remote alarms

(GA1GA20)
M194
SUBD25 pins female
Rel command HST
for future use
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
179 / 514
green markers
OUT
J1
IN
J2
OUT
J3
IN
J4
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
yellow markers
In current release only connectors (J1) and (J2) are used for the connection of the 2Mbit/s WST
of the corresponding channel. Connectors (J3) and (J4) are not used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 96. Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST front connector layout and numbering
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
180 / 514

4.2.3 Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connector layout

4.2.4 Transceiver shelf connectors
M2
M4
M5
M1
BATT.A
M3
BATT.B
M7
M6
BATT.A
FOR TRANCEIVERS
04
BATT.B
FOR TRANCEIVERS
59
Legend on page 182
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 97. Transceiver shelf connector numbering at reartop side
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
181 / 514

Power supply connectors (M2)
(M3) (M5) (M6) :
Usage and connection: see para.4.4 on page 190
Pinout:
Pins

a)
Meaning
+BATT
+BATTERY
A2
GND
Ground
A3
BATT
Battery
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A1
A
A3
A1
b)
(M1) (M4) connectors: for usage see Tab. 37. on page 191.
c)
(M7) connector: CAN RT bus terminated by a CAN bus terminator (see Fig. 104.
ED
on page 189).
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
182 / 514

4.3 Cable kits and cable types

The following Tab. 32. lists the cable kits envisaged for 9600LSY system and indicates the cable types
used in such kits, the drawing of which are given in the associated figures.
Notes for figures:
a)
b)
c)
the writings on cable connectors (like (A1) , (A2) , etc.) are used as CABLE SIDE information in the
following paragraphs, to point out the correct cable connections;
some labels are colored. In conjunction with the colored markers present on some units, this
facilitates cabling, matching the colour on cable label with that of colored marker on the unit front
plate;
in the CannonCannon cables the pin connection is 1:1 (i.e. pin 1 left connected to pin 1 right, pin
2 left connected to pin 2 right, etc.).
Tab. 32. Cable kits and cable types

P/N (REF. in
Tab. 13. on
page 122)
CABLE
TYPES
CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS
REF.[9]
A, B, C, D, E
Fig. 98. page 184
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL NO SPACE

DIV.
REF.[10]
F, G
Fig. 99. page 185
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL WITH SPACE

DIV
REF.[11]
Fig. 99. page 185
CABLE KIT FOR REUSE (1 RACK)
REF.[12]
K, N, P
Fig. 100. page 186
CABLE KIT FOR

REUSE (2 RACKS) (N.B.1)
REF.[13]
KK, NN, PP
Fig. 101. page 187
CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL

FOR WMSN
A, D
Fig. 98. page 184
REF.[14]
Fig. 103. page 189
Fig. 98. page 184
FANS UNIT CABLE KIT
REF.[15]
Fig. 102. page 188
Fig. 98. page 184
FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT
REF.[16]
Fig. 102. page 188
ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING
REF.[28]
Fig. 98. page 184
Fig. 104. page 189
CABLE KIT
Canbus Terminator (N.B.2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
1
2
FIGURE
the use of this kit is not specified in current edition of this handbook.
Each Can bus line must be terminated by a plug with two load resistors (120 ohm resistors
mounted on SUBD9 pins male connectors inserted on female connectors).
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
183 / 514

A: 3pins female for power supply
A1
N.B.
A2
B: 3pins female 450 for power supply
B1
B2
N.B.
C: 9pins Cannon male / 9pins Cannon male
C2
N.B.
C1
D: 9pins Cannon female / 9pins Cannon male
D2
D1
N.B.
E: 25pins Cannon male / 25pins Cannon male
E1
E2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
N.B.
Labelling depending on cable usage

Fig. 98. System cabling: types of used cables (A, B, C, D, E)
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
184 / 514

F: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
RT n
J10
F1
signal flow
MODEM n
J3
F2
red label
blue label
G: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
RT n
J5
G1
signal flow
red label
MODEM n
J1
G2
blue label
H: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
RT n
J2
H1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
white label
signal flow
MODEM n
J4
H2
white label
Fig. 99. System cabling: types of used cables (F, G, H)
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
185 / 514
RT n
J11 V (H)
K1
signal flow
white label
RT n
J11 H (V)
MODEM n
J4 H (V)

K: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
K2
white label
signal flow
white label
MODEM n
J4 V (H)
white label
P: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
RT n
J11 V (H)
P1
signal flow
white label
RT n
J11 H (V)
MODEM n
J5 H (V)
P2
white label
signal flow
white label
MODEM n
J5 V (H)
white label
N: SMA.M. 900 / SMA.M. 900
RT n
J6 H (V)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N1
white label
signal flow
RT n
J6 V (H)
white label
N2
Fig. 100. System cabling: types of used cables (K, N, P)
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
186 / 514

KK: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
RT n
J11 V (H)
(RACK1)
KK1
signal flow
white label
RT n
J11 H (V)
(RACK1)
MODEM n
J4 H (V)
(RACK2)
KK2
white label
signal flow
white label
MODEM n
J4 V (H)
(RACK2)
white label
PP: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
RT n
J11 V (H)
(RACK1)
PP1
signal flow
white label
RT n
J11 H (V)
(RACK1)
MODEM n
J5 H (V)
(RACK2)
PP2
white label
signal flow
white label
MODEM n
J5 V (H)
(RACK2)
white label
NN: SMA.M. 900 / SMA.M. 900
RT n
J6 H (V)
(RACK1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NN1
white label
signal flow
RT n
J6 V (H)
(RACK2)
white label
NN2
Fig. 101. System cabling: types of used cables (KK, NN, PP)
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
187 / 514

Q: 9pins Cannon male 300 / 9pins Cannon male
Q2
Q1
R: 9pins Cannon male 300 / 9pins Cannon male 300

R2
R1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 102. System cabling: types of used cables (Q, R)
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
188 / 514
S: 1channel extension
S1
signal flow
S2
Sub.ADM STM n
J1
Sub.ADM STM n
J2
yellow label
green label
RRA n
J2
yellow label
S3
signal flow
RRA n
J1
green label
S4
Fig. 103. System cabling: types of used cables (S)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
T: CANbus terminator
Fig. 104. System cabling: types of used cables (T)
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
189 / 514
4.4 Power supply distribution connections

For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page 183.
N.B.
Tab. 33. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS
CABLE
TYPE
N.
CABLE SIDE (A1) & LABEL

(N.B.2)
Sub. RT / M2 Batt.A
(N.B.1)
T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 1A
Sub. RT / M3 Batt.B
(N.B.1)
T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 1B
Sub. RT / M5 Batt.A
(N.B.1)
Sub. RT / M6 Batt.B
(N.B.1)
Sub. B.B. / M1 Batt.A
(N.B.3)
Sub. B.B. / M2 Batt.B
(N.B.4)
Tab. 34. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT
Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT
CABLE
TYPE
B
CABLE SIDE (B2) & LABEL

(N.B.2)
N.
Fans Unit down (up) / M1 Batt.A (N.B.5)
Fans Unit down (up) / M4 Batt.B (N.B.5)
Tab. 35. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT
CABLE
TYPE
B

(N.B.2)
N.
Fans Unit down (up) / M1 Batt.A (N.B.6)
Fans Unit down (up) / M4 Batt.B (N.B.6)
Tab. 36. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL
FOR WMSN
CABLE
TYPE
N.
N.B.
1
2
3
4
5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
6
7
ED

(N.B.2)
ADM CONGI / C1
(N.B.7)
ADM SERGI / S1
(N.B.7)
see Fig. 97. page 181

connected to Power Supply input connector of PSF1 (see Fig. 64. page 135)
connected to Power Supply input connector of PSF2 (see Fig. 64. page 135)
connected to Power Supply input connectors M1/M4 (see Fig. 93. page 172) of BBs FANS
shelf (see POS.(E) in Fig. 55. on page 126)
connected to Power Supply input connectors M1/M4 (see Fig. 93. page 172) of ADMs
FANS shelf (see POS.(L) in Fig. 55. on page 126)
refer to 1650SMC documentation
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
190 / 514
4.5 Signal connections between shelves

N.B.
For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page 183.
Tab. 37. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS
CABLE 1st. SIDE
CABLE 2nd SIDE
CABLE
TYPE
N.
CABLE
SIDE
E1
Sub. RT / M4
(N.B.1)
E2
Sub. BB / M186
(N.B.2)
C1
Sub. RT / M1
(N.B.1)
C2
Sub. BB / M180
(N.B.2)
D1
Sub. BB / M184
(N.B.2)
D2
TRU Alarm ext. / M7 (N.B.3)
LABEL & CONNECTION
CABLE
SIDE
Tab. 38. Signal connections: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT and FANS UNIT
EXTENSION CABLE KIT
a)
Configuration: BB FAN shelf only

CABLE 1st. SIDE
CABLE 2nd SIDE
CABLE
TYPE
N.
CABLE
SIDE
LABEL & CONNECTION
CABLE
SIDE
Q1
Fans Unit down (up) / M2

(N.B.4)
Q2
Sub. BB / M187

(N.B.4)
b)
LABEL & CONNECTION

(N.B.2)
Configuration: BB FAN shelf + ADM FAN shelf

CABLE 1st. SIDE
CABLE 2nd SIDE
CABLE
TYPE
N.
CABLE
SIDE
LABEL & CONNECTION
CABLE
SIDE
Q1

(N.B.4)
Q2
Sub. BB / M187
R1

(N.B.4)
R2

(N.B.5)

(N.B.5)
N.B.
1
2
3
4
5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LABEL & CONNECTION
ED
LABEL & CONNECTION

(N.B.2)

connected to connectors M2/M3 (see Fig. 93. page 172) of BBs FANS shelf
(see POS.(E) in Fig. 55. on page 126)
connected to connectors M2/M3 (see Fig. 93. page 172) of ADMs FANS shelf
(see POS.(L) in Fig. 55. on page 126)
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
191 / 514
CABLE 1st. SIDE

CABLE
TYPE
N.
CABLE
SIDE
D1
ADM CONGI / C3
N.B.
1
2
3
CABLE 2nd SIDE

CABLE
SIDE
LABEL & CONNECTION
(N.B.1)
D2
TRU Alarm ext. / M6 (N.B.2)
S1
Sub.ADM STMn / J1 (N.B.1)
S4
RRAn / J2
(N.B.3)
S2
Sub.ADM STMn / J2 (N.B.1)
S3
RRAn / J1
(N.B.3)
LABEL & CONNECTION
refer to 1650SMC documentation

Tab. 40. Signal connections: Cables belonging to ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING

CABLE 1st. SIDE
CABLE
TYPE
N.
CABLE
SIDE
D1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
1
2
CABLE 2nd SIDE
LABEL & CONNECTION

Housek. / M2
(N.B.1)
CABLE
SIDE
D2
LABEL & CONNECTION

Sub. BB / M179
(N.B.2)

03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
192 / 514

Tab. 39. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR
WMSN
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

4.6 ModemTransceiverBranching connections

The connections among Modems, Transceivers and Branching depend on the following possible
configurations:
case a ) : without Reuse and without Diversity

see page 194
case b ) : without Reuse and with Diversity

see page 196
case c ) : with Reuse and without Diversity

see page 198
case d ) : with Reuse and with Diversity

see page 200
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
193 / 514
a)
Without Reuse and without Diversity
In this figure, the writings near the arrows (that show the signal direction) on the cable indicate the
CABLE TYPE and the CABLE SIDE information.
E.g. G2 near MODEM J1 means that:
cable type G is used
and that its side G2 has to be connected to MODEMs connector J1
signal flows out from connector J1

N.B.
For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page
183.
To locate the front connectors indicated in such figure, use:
for MODEM unit: Fig. 75. on page 152
for TRANSCEIVER unit: Fig. 87. on page 165
For the connections between TRANSCEIVER unit and Rx / Tx Branching, refer to documents cited
in para.3.8.1 on page 168.
Requirements:
MODEM does not need any CANCCOMB module (see Fig. 74. on page 151)
TRANSCEIVER:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
internal components: standard configuration (see Fig. 81. on page 159).
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
194 / 514

See Fig. 105. on page 195.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TX
BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
RX
BRANCHING
BASE BAND SHELF

G2
MODEM n
ED
J1
J2
J3
F2
J4
J5
J9
J10
F1
J11
G1
J5
J6
J14
955.203.292 Q
TRANSCEIVER n
Fig. 105. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and without Diversity
03
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
195 / 514
b)
Without Reuse and with Diversity

N.B.
183.
Requirements:
MODEM needs one CANCCOMB module (see Fig. 74. on page 151)
TRANSCEIVER:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
internal components: configuration with Diversity Receiver, in addition to standard

components (see Fig. 83. on page 160).
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
196 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TX
BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
RX
BRANCHING
BASE BAND SHELF

G2
MODEM n
ED
J1
J2
J3
F2
H2
H1
955.203.292 Q
J4
J5
J1
J9
J2
J10
J3
J11
F1
G1
J5
J6
J14
TRANSCEIVER n
Fig. 106. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and with Diversity
03
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
197 / 514
c)
With Reuse and without Diversity

N.B.
183.
The connections must be done between two contiguous pairs of channels, i.e.:
(MODEM 0 + TRANSCEIVER 0) connected to (MODEM 1 + TRANSCEIVER 1)
....

Requirements:
both MODEMs need one CANCCOMB module (see Fig. 74. on page 151)
TRANSCEIVERs: the two transceivers are configured differently from each other:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
one Transceiver as follows:
internal components: configuration with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit, in addition to

standard components (see Fig. 82. on page 160)
hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as MASTER
the other Transceiver as follows:
internal components: standard configuration (see Fig. 81. on page 159)
hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as SLAVE
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
198 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TX
BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
ED
J10
K1
J11
G1
J5
N1
955.203.292 Q
J6
J14
TRANSCEIVER V (H)
TRANSCEIVER H (V)
RX
BRANCHING
BASE BAND SHELF

MODEM EVEN
H (V)
MODEM EVEN +1
V (H)
G2
F2
F2
J1
J1
G2
J2
J2
J3
J3
J4
K2
K2
J4
J5
J5
J9
J9
F1
J10
F1
J11
K1
J5
G1
J6
N2
J14
Fig. 107. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and without Diversity
03
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
199 / 514
d)
With Reuse and with Diversity

N.B.
183.
The connections must be done between two contiguous pairs of channels, i.e.:
....

Requirements:
both MODEMs need two CANCCOMB modules (see Fig. 74. on page 151)
TRANSCEIVERs: the two transceivers are configured differently from each other:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
one Transceiver as follows:
internal components: configuration with Diversity Receiver and with

TR.Frequency Reuse Kit, in addition to standard components (see Fig. 84. on page
161)
hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as MASTER
the other Transceiver as follows:
internal components: configuration with Diversity Receiver, in addition to standard

components (see Fig. 83. on page 160)
hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as SLAVE
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
200 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TX
BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
ED
H2
F1
H1
P1
G1
N1
955.203.292 Q
J1
J9
J2
J10
J3
J11
J5
J6
J14
TRANSCEIVER V (H)
BASE BAND SHELF
G2
TRANSCEIVER H (V)
RX
BRANCHING

MODEM EVEN
H (V)
MODEM EVEN +1
V (H)
F2
F2
H2
J1
J1
G2
J2
J2
J3
J3
J4
J4
J5
P2
P2
J5
J1
J9
J2
J10
J3
J11
H1
F1
P1
J5
G1
J6
N2
J14
Fig. 108. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and with Diversity
03
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
201 / 514
4.7.1 Power Line Interface

The Power Line interface is located on the TRU unit (see Fig. 94. on page 176).
The main characteristics are reported in para.6.2.2 on page 323.
4.7.2 SDH interfaces

The SDH interfaces (line side) can be electrical or optical.
Their access is on the front panel of units RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY (1 channel per unit); see
para.3.6.4 on page 147 (RRACHANNEL), and para.3.6.5 on page 149 (RRASTANDBY).
Electrical interfaces
The connector used is Siemens, 1.0/2.3 75ohm male coax.
Optical interfaces
The connector used is SC/PC or FC/PC.
For Optical Safety refer to para.6.8 on page 339.
Maximum cables number: N.8 inputs and N.8 outputs.
4.7.3 Input / Output Unprotected WST

The Subrack Access Area provides external access for WST channels by Siemens connectors, 1.0/2.3
75ohm male coax.
Maximum cables number: N.8 inputs and N.8 outputs on BaseBand Subrack access area; see para.4.2.3
on page 180.
4.7.4 Input / Output Protected WST

Input /Output WST protected is available on Service unit (see para.3.6.3 on page 144)
The connector used is Siemens 1.0/2.3 75ohm male coax.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Maximum cables number: N.1 input and N.1 output.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
202 / 514

4.7 External interfaces

4.7.5 Auxiliary Channels

The Subrack Access Area provides external access for auxiliary channels by three SUBD 25 pins female
connectors specified in the following.
This table sums up the interfaces available:
Tab. 41. Summary of auxiliary channels
N.
bit/s
Format
inserted/
extracted
9600
asynchronous
V24/V28
(selectable)
RSOH/RFCOH
64k
G703
RSOH/RFCOH
64k
3
or
2+1
RSOH/RFCOH
V11
64K/128K
RSOH/RFCOH
(128 K) only
RFCOH
Speech
telephonic
RSOH/RFCOH
Speech
I/O 3dBm
RSOH/RFCOH
Speech
I/O 3dBm
RFCOH
Speech
Out 400 mW
4 ohm
EOW
(only extract)
64k
G703
RFCOH or ADM
Connector
wires
M182 on BB access
area. See
Tab. 42. on page
204
Notes
12
M191 on BB access
area. See
Tab. 44. on page
206
24
(SW configurable)
connected to 1 or
2 bytes
RJ11
Connector (J5) on
Service Unit
(Fig. 69. page 145)
EOW
12
Analog
Party line
TPH
Available on
Remote Unit
to loudspeaker
TPH to ADM
M190 on BB access
area. See
Tab. 43. on page
205
M182 on BB access
area. See
Tab. 42. on page
204
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
203 / 514
Tab. 42. Aux channel G703 and RS232 BB shelfs M182 connector pinout
PIN
SIGNAL NAME

M182 : SUBD25 pins female

SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
G703 TX+ (A)
64 kb data channel output port A
G703 RX+ (A)
64 kb data channel input port A
G703 TX+ (B)
64 kb data channel output port B
G703 RX+ (B)
64 kb data channel input port B
G703 TX+ (C)
64 kb data channel output port C
G703 RX+ (C)
64 kb data channel input port C
DATI 9600 TX
9.6 kb data channel output
10
G703 TX+ TPH
64 kb data channel output for VOAD
11
G703 RX+ TPH
64 kb data channel input for VOAD
7
8
9
14
12
25
13
13
GND
14
G703 TX (A)
64 kb data channel output port A
15
G703 RX (A)
64 kb data channel input port A
16
G703 TX (B)
64 kb data channel output port B
17
G703 RX (B)
64 kb data channel input port B
18
G703 TX (C)
64 kb data channel output port C
19
G703 RX (C)
64 kb data channel input port C
DATI 9600 RX
9.6 kb data channel input
23
G703 TX TPH
64 kb data channel output for VOAD
24
G703 RX TPH
64 kb data channel input for VOAD
20
21
22
25
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
Connector position in Fig. 95. on page 178.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
204 / 514
Tab. 43. Out party line OW, TPH and loudspeaker BB shelfs M190 connector pinout


PIN
14
25
13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
VF TX+ A
analog party line output path A
VF TX+ B
analog party line output path B
VF TX+ C
analog party line output path C
VF RX+ A
analog party line input path A
VF RX+ B
analog party line input path B
VF RX+ C
analog party line input path C
WIRE A TPH
output telephone (TPH)
VF TX+ A TPH
analog party line output path B VOAD
VF TX+ B TPH
analog party line output path A VOAD
10
VF RX+ A TPH
analog party line input path B VOAD
11
VF RX+ B TPH
analog party line input path A VOAD
12
LOUDSPEAKER +
output loudspeaker negative
13
GND
14
VF TX A
analog party line output path A
15
VF TX B
analog party line output path B
16
VF TX C
analog party line output path C
17
VF RX A
analog party line input path A
18
VF RX B
analog party line input path B
19
VF RX C
analog party line input path C
20
WIRE B TPH
output telephone (TPH)
21
VF TX A TPH
analog party line output path A VOAD
22
VF TX B TPH
analog party line output path B VOAD
23
VF RX A TPH
analog party line input path A VOAD
24
VF RX B TPH
analog party line input path B VOAD
25
LOUDSPEAKER
output loudspeaker negative
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
205 / 514
Tab. 44. Aux channel V11 BB shelfs M191 connector pinout
PIN
14
25
13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
SIGNAL NAME


SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
DATI+ V11 TX (A)
64 kb data channel positive output port A
CK+ V11 TX (A)
TX clock positive port A
DATI+ V11 RX (A)
64 kb data channel positive input port A
DATI+ V11 TX (B)
64 kb data channel positive output port B
CK+ V11 TX (B)
TX clock positive port B
DATI+ V11 RX (B)
64 kb data channel positive input port B
DATI+ V11 TX (C)
64 kb data channel positive output port C
CK+ V11 X (C)
TX clock positive port C
DATI+ V11 RX (C)
64 kb data channel positive input port C
10
DATI+ V11 TX (D)
64 kb data channel positive output port D
11
CK+ V11 TX (D)
TX clock positive port D
12
DATI+ V11 RX (D)
64 kb data channel positive input port D
13
GND
14
DATI V11 TX (A)
64 kb data channel negative output port A
15
CK V11 TX (A)
TX clock negative port A
16
DATI V11 RX (A)
64 kb data channel negative input port A
17
DATI V11 TX (B)
64 kb data channel negative output port B
18
CK V11 TX (B)
TX clock negative port B
19
DATI V11 RX (B)
64 kb data channel negative input port B
20
DATI V11 TX (C)
64 kb data channel negative output port C
21
CK V11 TX (C)
TX clock negative port C
22
DATI V11 RX (C)
64 kb data channel negative input port C
23
DATI V11 TX (D)
64 kb data channel negative output port D
24
CK V11 TX (D)
TX clock negative port D
25
DATI V11 RX (D)
64 kb data channel negative input port D
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
206 / 514
4.7.6 Management interfaces

The System Controller unit (see Fig. 67. on page 141) provides the following external access points:
I/0 for TMN (QB3)
BNC connector 10BASE2
RJ45 connector 10BASET and EC Debug Network or EC local debug:

Tab. 45. RJ45 Connector for 10baseT interface on System Controller unit
Pin
Signal
TPTXP
TPTXN
TPRXP
4
5
6
TPRXN
7
8
GND
Craft terminal interface (F)

The connection for F interface (RS232 to local PC) is provided on ESC unit through a standard SUB
9pin female connector:
Tab. 46. RS232 for F interface connection table
PAIR
WIRE
RS232
(SAM side)
RJ45
(PC side)
Not used
Not used
White / Blue ring
Not used
Not used
Blue
Not used
Not used
White / Green ring
Green
Not used
Not used
White / Brown ring
Not used
Not used
Brown
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
COLOR
White / Orange ring

Orange
The special cable needed to connect the CRAFT TERMINAL to the system is supplied with
the equipment.
Can Bus and RC debug local access by RJ45

for Alcatel internal use only.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
207 / 514
4.7.7 Station Alarms

Station alarm interface access is provided in TRU unit, connectors (M1) to (M5); see Fig. 94. on page 176.
Tab. 47. LHR Station Alarms connector pinout
PIN
ALARM
MEANING
+VSERV
+Service battery
C
RATTD
3
1
6
9
ABN
RURG
HW/SW
Alarm storing command
HW
Yellow LED switch on Alarm storing
HWSW
Yellow LED switch on Abnormal condition
SW
Red LED (1) switch on Urgent alarm
HWSW
RNURG
Red LED (2) switch on Not Urgent alarm
HWSW
VSERV
Service battery
CH
8
9
Green LED switch on buzzer
HW
TOR
VBATT1 failure or VBATT2 failure
HW
GND
GROUND
For further information, please refer to para.7.4.2 on page 363.
4.7.8 Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms

4.7.8.1 General characteristics
Standard Housekeeping
I/O
Housekeeping external unit

N
I/O
Input (station alarms)
22
Input (station alarms)
18 (additional)
Output (station controls)
48
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The interface characteristics here indicated apply both to summarizing alarms and housekeeping alarms:
The presence of active alarm correspond to closed relay contact with a common wire available to
the customer.
Electrical characteristics (V is voltage between the warm and the common wires) are:
ED
open contact 72 p V p 2V
I p 0.2mA
closed contact 2 p V <= 0V
I p 50mA
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
208 / 514

4.7.8.2 Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms

Summarizing and Out Housekeeping interface access is provided by means of three SUBD 25pins
female connectors on Access area subrack specified in the following tables Tab. 48. thru Tab. 50.
For the meaning of the signals, please refer to Tab. 62. on page 364.
Tab. 48. Out Remote alarms (GA1GA20) BB shelfs M193 connector pinout
PIN
14
25
13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
OUTGA1
output general alarm
OUTGA3
OUTGA5
OUTGA6
OUTGA8
OUTGA10
OUTGA11
OUTGA13
OUTGA15
10
OUTGA16
11
OUTGA18
12
OUTGA20
13
GND
gnd
14
OUTGA2
15
OUTGA4
16
COMA
common rele
17
OUTGA7
18
OUTGA9
19
COMB
common rele
20
OUTGA12
21
OUTGA14
22
COMC
common rele
23
OUTGA17
24
OUTGA19
25
COMD
common rele
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
209 / 514
Tab. 49. Out Remote alarms (GA21GA40) BB shelfs M183 connector pinout
PIN
14
25
13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
SIGNAL NAME


SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
OUTGA21
OUTGA23
OUTGA25
OUTGA26
OUTGA28
OUTGA30
OUTGA31
OUTGA33
OUTGA35
10
OUTGA36
11
OUTGA38
12
OUTGA40
13
GND
gnd
14
OUTGA22
15
OUTGA24
16
COME
common rele
17
OUTGA27
18
OUTGA29
19
COMF
common rele
20
OUTGA32
21
OUTGA34
22
COMG
common rele
23
OUTGA37
24
OUTGA39
25
COMH
common rele
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
210 / 514
Tab. 50. Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms (GA41GA48) BB shelfs M192
connector pinout

PIN
14
25
13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
OUTHK1
housekeeping output
OUTHK3
housekeeping output
OUTHK5
housekeeping output
OUTHK6
housekeeping output
OUTHK8
housekeeping output
OUTHK10
housekeeping output
OUTGA41
OUTGA43
TAND
10
OUTGA45
11
OUTGA47
12
TOR
13
GND
14
OUTHK2
housekeeping output
15
OUTHK4
housekeeping output
16
COMI
common rele
17
OUTHK7
housekeeping output
18
OUTHK9
housekeeping output
19
COML
common rele
20
OUTHK42
housekeeping output
21
OUTHK44
housekeeping output
22
COMM
common rele
23
OUTHK46
housekeeping output
24
OUTHK48
housekeeping output
25
COMN
common rele
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
211 / 514
Summarizing and Out Housekeeping interface access is provided by means of one SUBD 25pins
female connector on Access area subrack specified in the following Tab. 51. herebelow.
With the use of the Additional Housekeeping unit, it is possible to increase by 18 the HK Inputs. The access
is on the same unit (see Tab. 52. on page 213).
Tab. 51. Input Housekeeping BB shelfs M185 connector pinout
PIN
14
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
INHK1
housekeeping input
INHK3
housekeeping input
INHK5
housekeeping input
INHK7
housekeeping input
INHK9
housekeeping input
INHK11
housekeeping input
INHK13
housekeeping input
INHK15
housekeeping input
INHK17
housekeeping input
10
INHK19
housekeeping input
11
INHK21
housekeeping input
12
25
13
13
GND
14
INHK2
housekeeping input
15
INHK4
housekeeping input
16
INHK6
housekeeping input
17
INHK8
housekeeping input
18
INHK10
housekeeping input
19
INHK12
housekeeping input
20
INHK14
housekeeping input
21
INHK16
housekeeping input
22
INHK18
housekeeping input
23
INHK20
housekeeping input
24
INHK22
housekeeping input
25
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
212 / 514

4.7.8.3 Input Housekeeping alarms
Tab. 52. Input Housekeeping Additional Housekeeping units M1 connector pinout


PIN
14
25
13
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
INHK1EXT
housekeeping input
INHK2EXT
housekeeping input
INHK3EXT
housekeeping input
INHK4EXT
housekeeping input
INHK5EXT
housekeeping input
INHK6EXT
housekeeping input
INHK7EXT
housekeeping input
INHK8EXT
housekeeping input
INHK9EXT
housekeeping input
10
INHK10EXT
housekeeping input
11
INHK11EXT
housekeeping input
12
INHK12EXT
housekeeping input
13
INHK13EXT
housekeeping input
14
INHK14EXT
housekeeping input
15
INHK15EXT
housekeeping input
16
INHK16EXT
housekeeping input
18
INHK18EXT
housekeeping input
19
GND
20
XX
internal use
21
XX
internal use
22
XX
internal use
23
XX
internal use
24
XX
internal use
25
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
213 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
214 / 514
5 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

5.1 Introduction
The general block diagrams for LHR and WMSN configurations are respectively shown in following
Fig. 109. and Fig. 110.
CMI 9
RRA
SW
RFCOH
DCCR
MD
TR
WST 2Mb/s
RRA
RFCOH
SW
MD
TR
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
CMI 1
RRA
DCCR
ECT
RFCOH
SW
MD
TR
DCCR
F
EOW
QB3
OS
DCCR
SC
64 Kb
SERVICE
WST 2Mb/s
DCCR
DCCR
CMI 0
RRA
DISTRIB.
MD
RFCOH
TR
RADIO
PROTECTION
Fig. 109. LHR system (N+1 / N+0)
RRA
SW
RFCOH
MD
TR
CMI 7
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
RRA
RFCOH
SW
MD
TR
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
1650SMC
CMI 2
RRA
RFCOH
SW
MD
TR
CMI 1
DCCR
DCCR
CMI 0
EOW
F
QB3
Nx64
Kb
SC
DCCR
64 Kb
WST 2Mb/s
DCCR
DCCR
RRA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SERVICE
ECT
OS
DISTRIB.
RFCOH
MD
TR
RADIO
PROTECTION
Fig. 110. WMSN system (N+1 / N+0)
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
215 / 514
This handbook gives no detailed information on 1650SMC equipment. For this purpose,
please refer to 1650SMC specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.2 on page 471) with the
following exception:
In the application for 9600 LSY, the FAN SHELF used for 1650SMC is not
that described in the 1650SMC documentation, but that described in this
handbook.
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this chapter are:
chapter 2 on page 39
chapter 3 on page 121
System description
Physical Configuration
Information given in this chapter is organized as follows:
Equipment Control subsystem

that includes:
Control Subsystem Architecture (HW+SW):
Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture:
Control Subsystem Software Architecture:
Signal Management:
Remote Inventory subsystem:
System Controller unit description:
Flash Card description:
Additional Housekeeping unit description:
para.5.2 starting on page 217
Power Supply subsystem:
Baseband subsystem:
that includes:
Interconnection general block diagrams:

para.5.4.1 starting on page 285
RRACHANNEL STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST : para.5.4.2 starting on page 287
RRASTANDBY STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST : para.5.4.3 starting on page 289
STM1 optical module:

128QAM MODEM STM1 1WSTandSTM0 0WST: para.5.4.5 starting on page 293
Service and Additional Voice unit:

Transceiver subsystem:
that includes:
Interconnection general block diagrams:
DC/DC converter module:
Transmit and Service module:
Receive & IF Rx module:
Local Oscillator module:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Fans subsystem:


03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
216 / 514

This chapter describes in detail the functional operation of LHR equipment.

5.2 Equipment Control Subsystem

5.2.1 Control Subsystem Architecture
The equipment control subsystem is the full set of software facilities and the full set of hardware items,
devices and connections necessary to support such software.
This paragraph provides the overall architecture of this subsystem describing the macro functionalities
performed (reported in the following in italic character) and partitioning these functionalities into hardware
and software components.
5.2.1.1 Functionalities
Digital transmission systems can be broadly described as a collection of multiplexing, framing, transport,
routeing, timing and protection processes. Each of these processes can be decomposed into a collection
of atomic functions. These atomic functions interact with other functionalities, the equipment management
functionalities, which provide the atomic functions with configuration data and monitor the signals they are
processing, providing performance monitoring and alarms conditions to an external management system,
which is able to access to these information by means of communication functions.
Thus, the product functionalities can be broadly described according to the following functional
decomposition (see Fig. 111. herebelow):
Atomic Functions (AF)

Equipment Management Functions (EMF)
Message Communication Functions (MCF)
atomic
function
fault &
performance
monitoring
atomic
function
DCC line side

MCF
EMF
DCCR radio side
atomic
function
configuration &
provisioning
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 111. Functional decomposition

The generic supervision process inside the NE, describes the way in which the occurrence of a
disturbance or fault is analyzed with the purpose of providing an appropriate indication of performance
and/or detected fault condition.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
217 / 514
From transmission point of view, most atomic functions monitor the signals they are processing for certain
characteristics and provide performance information and/or alarm conditions based on these
characteristics. Therefore, transmission supervision process provides information on the external
interface signals that are processed by an NE.
Any equipment fault is represented by the unavailability of the affected functions because the transmission
management has no knowledge of the equipment as such. Equipment supervision process is concerned
with the fault localization and repair of the equipment itself. It does not require a knowledge of the
transmission network.
The supervision process is performed both in the atomic functions and in the management functions, so
it can be decomposed into major subprocesses: atomic function fault management and performance
monitoring, management function fault management, management function performance monitoring and
radio performance monitoring (see Fig. 112. herebelow). These processes are described in the next
paragraphs.
Atomic function
Fault & Performance
Monitoring process
cZZZ
pZZZ
Management function
Performance Monitoring
process
rpZZZ
Management function
Fault Management
process
Management function
Radio Performance
Monitoring process
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 112. Supervision process decomposition
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
218 / 514

Transmission and equipment supervision processes are concerned with the management of the
transmission resources in the network and they are only interested in the functionality provided by a NE.
They require a functional representation of the NE that is implementation independent.
5.2.1.2 Atomic Functions

5.2.1.2.1 Supervision process

5.2.1.2.1.1 Fault management and performance monitoring process
The following Fig. 113. shows the supervision process inside the atomic functions. The anomalies
integration, consequent action control and defects correlations functions are components of the fault
management process and are performed both in the trail termination function and in trail adaptation
function. The performance monitoring primitives processing function represent the performance
monitoring process and is performed only inside the trail termination function.
The output signals cZZZ are the input signals for the management function fault management process,
while the output signals pZZZ are the input signals for the management function performance monitoring
process.
Anomalies
Defects
Near end
Anomalies
Consequent
Actions
aZZZ
Anomalies
Integration
Consequent
Actions
Control
Near end
defects
dZZZ
Perf. Mon.
Primitives
Processing
1 second primitives
pZZZ/rpZZZ
Fault Cause
cZZZ
Defects
Correlation
report options
enable/disable
Fig. 113. Supervision process within atomic functions
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fault management process
Anomalies integration (f1)

Anomalies integration (or defect filter) provides a persistency check on the detected anomalies while
monitoring the data stream. When passed the defect is being detected.
Two class of defects are reported to the defect correlation for further processing: transmission and
equipment defects. Equipment defects (hardware fault) with signal transfer interruption will be
reported per replaceable unit. These defects will cause a performance primitive N_DS (see below)
activation if equipment protection (EPS) is not available.
This function is performed by HW.
Consequent action control (f2)

This process provides the generation and the control of action consequent to detected defects. The
consequent action control process for each specific atomic function is described in the related
sections.
This function is performed by HW.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
219 / 514
Defects correlation (f3)

Defect correlation process provides correlation to reduce the amount of information offered to the
EMF. It determines, from a set of activated defects, which fault is present.
This function is performed by SW.
These processes are summarized, for each atomic function, in Tab. 53. on page 221.
In order to simplify the reading of this table, it could be useful to remember the meaning of the RSPI
functional block (see ITUR 750 and ETS 300 635). It represents the radio frequency signal conversion
into an internal logic level STM1 signal, and viceversa. It contains the following radio functions (see
Fig. 114. below):
Modulation and TX functions in the Transmit side
Demodulation and RX functions in the Receive side
rxLOS rxFail
Radio side
demLOS
demFail
Receive
function
Demodulation
function
Transmit
function
Modulation
function
txFail txLOS
modFail
modLOS
Fig. 114. RSPI functional decomposition
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
If it is not possible to distinguish between loss of signal and internal failure for a given subfunction with a
sufficient degree of confidence, the minimal set of defect should be txFail, modFail, rxFail and demFail.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
220 / 514


Tab. 53. Fault management process

Functional
Blocks
Defect
Consequent
Action
Transmit Degraded
not Transmit Fail
Transmit Degraded
Transmit Fail
Transmit Fail
SPI source
(electrical)
SPI sink
(electrical/optical)
Loss of Signal
AIS
Loss Of Signal
Loss of Frame
AIS
not Loss of Signal
Loss Of Frame
SPI source
(optical)
RST sink
(line side)
Trace Identifier
Mismatch
AIS
not (Loss of Signal or Trace Identifier

Loss of Frame)
Mismatch
RST sink
(radio side)
Trace Identifier
Mismatch
AIS
(1)
Trace Identifier
Mismatch
RSPI RFCOH
source
RSPI RFCOH
sink
Loss of Frame
AIS
not (rxLOS or rxFail Loss Of Frame

or
demLOS
or
demFail)
Radio Channel
Identifier Mismatch
AIS
not (rxLOS or rxFail Radio Channel

or demLOS
Identifier Mismatch
or demFail
or Loss of Frame)
RSPI sink
(1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fault Causes
RST source
RSPI source
(2)
Defect
Correlations
txLOS
txLOS
txFail
not txLOS (2)
txFail
modFail
not (txLOS or txFail ) modFail

(2)
rxLOS
AIS
rxLOS
rxFail
AIS
not rxLOS (2)
rxFail
demLOS
AIS
not (rxLOS or rxFail)

(2)
demLOS
demFail
AIS
Not (rxLOS or rxFail demFail

or demLOS) (2)
This defect correlation is configuration dependent:
N+0: not (rxLOS or rxFail or demLOS or demFail or Loss of Frame)
N+1/N+2: not (rxLOS or rxFail or demLOS or demFail or Loss of Frame or Radio Channel
Identifier Mismatch). These defects are those generated by the channel currently working (RPS
protection), the same defects generated by the channel currently in standby state are not
considered in this defect correlation procedure.
This defect correlation is different from the one reported in draft MI/TM4048 (stable part)
In unbalanced configurations, defects coming from the unbalanced channels and generated from the not
working function (Rx or Tx) must be inhibited.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
221 / 514
The requirements for the performance monitoring is to provide both performance monitoring quality of
service (SDH regenerator section quality of service and typical radio sections quality of service) and
performance monitoring of radio specific parameters.
a)
Sections quality monitoring

The performance monitoring of SDH regenerator section (line side) must be consistent with the
performance monitoring of the remaining part of the SDH network ( e.g. optical link ). Methodology
used to provide performance monitoring are defined in DEN/TM 2246, ETS 300 417 series and
ITUT rec. G.783, G.784 and G.829. The evaluations on line side signal is given by means of B1
according to the standard methodology.
ADM
.......
MST
LHR
RST
SPI
RST
SPI
.. .....
Regenerator Section
Fig. 115. Regenerator section

Two different radio sections must be monitored (see Fig. 116. below):
a)
b)
Hop Section: the section between two radio stations inside the protection section. Due to
the RPS location it is not possible to perform the monitoring of the hop section by means
of standard methodologies. It must be provided in a proprietary way by means of Forward
Error Correction.
Link Section: the section identifying the protected section (the section outside the radio
protection switching). The performance monitoring of the radio link section may be
performed by using B1 bytes at each side of the section. Methodology used to provide this
performance monitoring are defined in DEN/TM 2246, ETS 300 417 series and ITUT rec.
G.783, G.784 and G.829.
LHR/WMSN
...
RST
RPS
RFCOH
LHR/WMSN
RSPI
RSPI
RFCOH
RPS
RST
...
Radio HOP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Radio LINK
Fig. 116. Radio sections
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
222 / 514

Performance monitoring process
b)
Radio specific parameter monitoring

Radio specific performance monitoring deals with monitoring of the radio specific functional blocks
RSPI and RPS. The parameters provided by this PM is used in close conjunction with the ordinary
ones related to quality transmission.
The global performance monitoring process performed in the LHR atomic functions is described in
the following Fig. 117. This process is completely applicable to the WMSN equipment. In this case
the PM related to the functional blocks performed by the WADM/WLT (i.e. at multiplex section level
by using B2 bytes) are added.
to EMF
to EMF
RLS1
One second
primitives
TLS1
RLS2
FSRD
PSAD
NDS
NEBC
OFS
One second filter
Performance PSA
primitives
PSR
RPS
FEC
RL
TL
Defect
EB
RSPI
OOF
RST
Fig. 117. PM inside atomic functions
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The one second primitives processing performs an integration of reported anomalies and defects by
counting them during a one second interval. At the end of each one second interval the contents of
the counters is made available to the performance monitoring process within the EMF for further
processing. Hereafter these performance primitives are described:
ED
Near end Errored Block Count (N_EBC) (f11)

This primitive counts, every second, the number of errored nearend blocks within that second.
A block is errored if one or more EDC violations are detected.
Near end defect second determination process (N_DS) (f12)

Every second with at least one occurrence of TSF consequent action (LOS, LOF, TIM ....) or
equipment defect is indicated as a near end defect second.
Out of Frame Second (OFS)

A OFS is a second in which the frame alignment process was in the OOF state for at least a part
of that second.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
223 / 514
Received Level Threshold Second (RLTS)

A Received Level Second is generated if in one second period the detected RL is below a
predefined threshold. The threshold value is also expressed in minus dBm. At least two RLS
events are required corresponding to two different threshold values (TBD).
Transmitted Level Threshold Second (TLTS)

A Transmitted Level Second is generated if in one second period the detected TL is greater than
a predefined threshold. The threshold value is also expressed in dB. One additional TLTS
corresponding to a different threshold is optional (TBD).
This processing is performed only if ATPC functionality is available.
Protection Switch Actual Duration (PSAD)

Protection Switch Actual Duration represents one second period in which a channel is in the
switched status for at least a fraction of that second. This event is generated only for automatic
switches.
This event is defined for any channel involved in the protection scheme, both protected and
protecting channel, for protected channel this means that the associated traffic is carried by the
protecting channel, for the protecting channel that it is carrying traffic from a protected channel.
TBD in case of 1+1 non revertive mode (protected and protecting).
Failed Switch Request Duration (FSRD)

A Failed Switch Request Duration represents one second period in which at least for a fraction
of that second, an automatic switch request is detected active on the associated channel while
it is carrying regular traffic and the request cannot be completed. This event is required only
for working channels.
Hereafter the performance primitives that dont require one second filter are described:
Protection Switch Actual Count (PSAC)

Protection Switch Actual Count represents the number of protection switch actual occurrences
in one second. This counter is defined for any protected (working) or protecting (standby)
channel involved in the protection scheme (1+1, N+1, N+2). In case of protecting channel this
counter represents the number of any actual switch from any protected channel to this channel.
Failed Switch Request Count (FSRC)

Failed Switch Request Count represents the number of occurrences in one second of the
following events:
a protection switch request is activated on a working channel and the protecting channels
are not available
a working channel is restored from a protecting channel while the request is still active on
that channel.
This event must be generated only on protected channel. It must be generated in all the
protection scheme. The activation of a switch criterion on a given channel doesnt increment
the counter if another activation criterion is already present on that channel.
The one second primitives processing is performed by SW.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following Tab. 54. reports, for each atomic function, the entity monitored by the performance
primitives and the one second primitives provided to EMF for further processing.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
224 / 514


Tab. 54. Entities monitored by the performance monitoring primitives

Functional
Block
SPI source
RST source
(line and radio side)
SPI sink
RST sink
(line side)
RST sink
(radio side)
Performance
Primitives
Monitored Entity
One Second
Primitives
Frame Alignment
Out Of Frame
OFS
SDH RS
Errored Block
N_EBC
N_DS
Radio Link Section
Transm. Def. => LOS,

LOF,
TIM)
Eqpt Def.
=> EQ
Errored Block
N_EBC
Transm.
(1)
Def.
RSPI source
Transmitted level
Def.
=> N_DS
demLOS,
LOF,
RCIM,
TIM
Eqpt
=> EQ
TL > Thres. 3
TLTS3
TL > Thres. 4 (opt.)
TLTS4
RSPI RFCOH sink
Frame Alignment
Out Of Frame
OFS
RSPI sink
Received level
RL < Thres. 1
RLTS1
RL < Thres. 2
RLTS2
RL < Thres. N (opt.)
RLTSN
FEC
N_EBC
Radio Hop (2)
Transm. Def. => rxLOS, N_DS

rxFail,
demLOS,
demFail,
LOF,
RCIM
Eqpt Def. => EQ
RPS
Protection switch actual PSA
PSAC
PSAD
Protection switch failed
FSRC
FSRD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(1)
(2)
ED
The transmission performance primitives are configuration dependent:
N+0: demLOS, LOF, TIM
N+1/N+2: demLOS, LOF, RCIM, TIM. The demLOS, LOF, RCIM defects are those generated
by the channel currently working (RPS protection), the same defects generated by the channel
currently in standby state are not considered as performance primitives.
Radio Hop performance monitoring hasnt be provided in N+0 configurations.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
225 / 514
In LHR NEs line and internal loopbacks can be performed at different levels, as described in para.2.6.4
on page 93.
The signal that is sent after the loopback can be an AIS (loop and AIS) or the same signal as it was received
(loop and continue).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Test process is performed by HW (according to software control).
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
226 / 514

5.2.1.2.2 Test management process

5.2.1.3 Management Functions

The management functions are handled by means of synchronous equipment management function block
described in the following figure. It provides the means through which the synchronous network element
function is managed by an internal or external manager.
SEMF
fault &
PM
Supervision
Process
AFs
NER
MCF
MAF
configuration &
provisioning
Fig. 118. Equipment management function

The SEMF interacts with the atomic functions by exchanging information across the MP reference points.
This information flow is related to configuration and provisioning data and to anomalies and defects
detected in the atomic functions. The EMF contains a number of filters that provide supervision process
by means of a data reduction mechanism on the information received across the MP reference points. The
filters outputs are available to the management application functions (MAF), via the network element
resources (NER). The NER provide event processing and data storage, while the MAF process the
information provide to and by the NER. The MAF represents the information as managed object according
to the object oriented approach.
The MAF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into object oriented
messages for transmission on DCCR channel and/or on Q interface. It also converts object oriented
messages coming from external manager into internal specific messages for AF configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The information to and from MAF is provide by means of the message communication function (MCF).
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
227 / 514
5.2.1.3.1 Supervision process

Fault management process

The following Fig. 119. shows the subprocesses composing the fault management process.
Unit
Alarms
Alarms
Logging
Fault Cause
Fault Cause
Severity
Persistency
Assignment
Alarms
Reporting
MCF
Station
Alarms
Fig. 119. Fault management inside management function
Fault cause persistency (f4)

The equipment management function performs a persistency check on the fault causes before
generating an alarm.
> Number of seconds for declaring and clearing the failure TBD.
EMF fault management severity assignment
EMF fault management logging
EMF fault management reporting
Unit alarms generation (f5)
Station alarms generation (f7)

They represent a synthesis of alarm with the purpose to provide an audible and visual indication to
the station operator.
All the equipment defects (including the ASICs faults) must be reported per replaceable unit. If a
replaceable unit is reported as being faulty, all the signals processed by this unit are assumed to be
interrupted. The atomic function performed by this unit will represent this situation activating the
performance primitive Defect Second (DS).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
All these processes are performed by SW.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
228 / 514

Performance monitoring process

The one second primitives related to the SDH regenerator section quality of service and typical radio
section quality of service must to be processed to determine the performance events (ES, SES, BBE). This
process is explained in the following Fig. 120.
Monitored
Second
Defect ?
(p_DS)
N
N
Anomalies?
(p_EBC >0)
Y
EB >=2400 ?
N
N
Available
State ?
Y
Available
State ?
ES = ES +1
BBE = BBE + EB
SES = SES +1
Data
Collection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 120. Performance events generation process
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
229 / 514
The following Fig. 121. shows the PM process inside the management functions.
Performance Reporting
Performance History
Information

QOS Alarm
Threshold crossing
control
Performance data collection
Performance Count Inhibition
Performance Events
SES
BBE
ES
Event processing
RPSI, RPS one second

performance primitives
OFS
NEBC
NDS
Fig. 121. PM inside management functions
EMF performance monitoring event processing (PM filter: f13, f14, f15, f16)
EMF performance count inhibition
EMF performance monitoring data collection (f31)

One second performance events are collected into current registers (15minutes and 24 hours).
Notice that no processing are necessary on RSPI and RPS one second performance primitives to
generate performance events.
EMF performance monitoring recent registers history management (f31)

At least 16 recent registers are required for 15 minutes and 1 for 24 hours.
EMF performance monitoring reporting management (f32)
EMF performance monitoring threshold crossing check management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
All these functionalities are, of course, performed by SW.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
230 / 514

5.2.1.3.2 Configuration and provisioning process

The information flow over the MP reference points related to configuration and provisioning data is
described in details for each atomic function in ETS 300 417 series and in G.783. It is to be noted the
necessity to provide to the RFCOH atomic functions with the following information:
the radio channel identifier expected value (to be compared with the one received on radio side,
functionality performed sink side)
the radio channel identifier value to be inserted in frame (functionality performed source side)
This information flow refers both to configuration and provisioning data passed to the atomic functions and
to status reports coming from the atomic function as response to a request from SEMF.
The channel number associated to each RT position and the definition of which positions assume
the spare rule in the radio protection scheme (RPS) must be configured by ECT operator.
This functionality is completely performed by software.
5.2.1.3.3 Software download
Software download process (local and remote) has the same feature already implemented for new
generation of the Alcatel equipment. In synthesis:
this process is hitless and causes no loss of control functionality when in progress
a roll back to previous release is available when problems arises with the new software version.
5.2.1.3.4 Security
5.2.1.3.5 Time stamping
Events are time stamped with the resolution of one second (according to G.784).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
231 / 514
This function provides facilities for the transport of the TMN messages. It receives and buffers messages
from the DCC, Q and F interfaces and from EMF. Messages not addressed to the local site are relayed
to one or more outgoing DCCs in accordance with the local routing procedures and/or to Q interface (see
the following figure). In this way the TMN can be provided with a direct logical link to any SDH equipment
via a single Q interface and the interconnecting DCCs.
MCF is associated with all atomic functions having a physical interface.
NE 1
AF
NE 2
DCC
DCC
AF
NE 3
DCC
AF
DCC
EMF
EMF
EMF
MCF
MCF
MCF
Q
TMN
Fig. 122. DCC routing

Q interface
When the access to the TMN is provided by the Q interface, it will be conform to the ITUT G.773.
QB3 protocol stack
F interface
F protocol stack
DCC interface
Only DCCR are managed in the MCF in case of LHR (line and radio side). DCCR and DCCM are
managed, line side, in case of WADM/WLT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
DCC protocol stack.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
232 / 514

5.2.1.4 Message Communication Functions

5.2.1.5 Protections
Several types of protections are present in LHR equipment. They can be categorized into two classes: trail
and equipment protection.
The protection types can be characterized by the following parameters:
protection architectures (1+1, M:N)
operation type (revertive, notrevertive)
protection switch requests

Hereafter this parameters are described only for Radio protection, in case of equipment protection similar
considerations can be applied.
5.2.1.5.1 Radio Protection (RPS)
Radio Protection is a trail protection. It is used to provide protection for a working channel. Generally, this
function provides m protection channels for n signals against trail associated failures, both for hardware
failure and temporary signal degradation or losses due to propagation effects (e.g. rain or multipath
phenomena).The signal on the working channel is protected. This type of protection is performed by
switching a working channel to a protection section when the working section fails or when its performance
falls below the required level. A RPS function is used to perform the switching between the protection and
working section. The status of the sections is made available to the RPS function to allow it to decide when
an automatic switch should be performed.
Protection architectures
LHR equipment can support two different protection architectures : 1+1 or M:N. They are
characterized by the detection of failure events by the RSPI function; and the resultant
reconfiguration uses the protection switching functions that are in the RPS.
A 1+1 protection architecture has one working (protected) trail supporting one normal traffic
signal, one protection (protecting) trail and a permanent bridge.
At the source end, the normal traffic signal is permanently bridged to both working and
protection trail. At the sink end, the condition of the two traffic signals are monitored and the
better of the two is selected.
Due to permanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected traffic
signal to be provided.
In 1+1 architecture single ended switching is provided. The switching is complete when the
traffic signal (service) is selected from protection trail at the end detecting the fault. The sink end
transfers the traffic signal (service) without communication with the source end.
This architecture is used both in revertive and nonrevertive mode.
Protection
Section
RFCOH
RST
RSPI
RSPI
RFCOH
RPS
RPS
RST
Working
Section
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RFCOH
RSPI
RSPI
RFCOH
NE A
NE B
Fig. 123. 1+1 Protection Switch Architecture
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
233 / 514
A M:N protection architecture has N working (protected) trails supporting a normal traffic signal
and M protecting trail that may support the normal signal (if a protection switch is active) or an
extra traffic signal or a null signal (if no protection switch is active),
At the source end, when a defect condition is detected on a working trail, or under the effect of
appropriate external commands, the transported signal is routed over the protection trail and
the possible extra traffic is lost. At the sink end, the signal from this protection trail is selected
instead.
In M:N architecture dual ended switching is necessary. The traffic signal is switched from the
active to the protection trail at both ends of the protection span.
Dualended switching requires a communication channel between the two end of the protection
trail. This channel is called RAPS (Radio Automatic Protection Switching) or DSI channel.
RAPS provides information regarding the activation of switching procedure or about information
on the channel status that have to be shared at both ends of the connection.
Under dualended switching protocol, switching at only one end is not allowed. The two ends
have to communicate each other to synchronize the transfer of the traffic signal (service). If, at
one end, a switching criterion is detected, with a certain priority, a parallelizing request for the
involved traffic signal is sent to the remote end. When the positive acknowledge is received, the
switching is performed.
This architecture is used in the revertive mode.
Protection
Section
RST
RFCOH
RSPI
.
.
.
..
..
..
RSPI
.
.
.
RFCOH
RST
.
.
.
.
.
.
Working
Section
RST
RFCOH
RSPI
RSPI
RFCOH
NE A
RST
NE B
Only present if extra (occasional) traffic is supported.
Fig. 124. M:N Protection Switch Architecture

Operation Type
Operation type may be Revertive or Notrevertive.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
M:N architecture is always revertive, 1+1 architecture may be revertive or not, this parameter can
be set by the management system, in revertive case it is possible to specify if the restore has to act
on channel 0 or on channel 1. In revertive mode of operation, the working channel is switched back
to the working section when the working section has recovered from failure or when a switch
command is released. In nonrevertive mode of operation, the switch is maintained even after
recovery from failure or release of a switch command.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
234 / 514

Switching Initiation Criteria Priority Management

When more than one switch request are present, the highest priority is served. Refer to the list given
in the following Tab. 55. This information cannot be set up by the management system.
Tab. 55. Switching Initiation Criteria Priority
Priority
Radio Protection Switch Request
Lockout
Forced Switch
AutoSwitch Signal Fail (SF)
AutoSwitch High Bit Error Rate (HBER)
AutoSwitch Low Bit Error Rate (LBER or EWH)
AutoSwitch Early Warning (EW or EWL)
Manual Switch
Wait To Restore
Do Not Revert [1]
10
Exercise [1]
11
No Request
N.B.
[1] Do Not Revert and Exercise Request have been listed in this order because an
exercise request can only be performed when the protection channel is not in use.
Another priority criteria is associated to each channel. This information is used to select the channel
of highest priority when different channels have the same switch request. This priority may be set up
by the management system.
Lockout, forced and manual switch, exercise are external requests (from management system). In
the following some of these RPS requests are explained.
Lockout
The lockout RPS request is applicable to a working and to a protection trail, in both cases it
excludes one trail (working or protecting) from protection schema. In fact it prevents a working
trail from being protected and it prevents a protection trail from being used for protection.
Exercise
Exercising the RPS is done in order to detect silent failures on the RPS. The exercise operation
performs all the steps to perform a switch except for the actual switch.
Two types of exercise may be used:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
a)
b)
ED
Single exercise: the operator send one command to perform a single exercise. At the end
of the operation, the NE returns the result to the OS.
Continuous Exercise: after starting by the operator, the exercise operation is repeated till
the operator sends the stop command.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
235 / 514
Automatic Switch Initiation Criteria

An automatic switch is only initiated upon detection of a failure at the receiving end(i.e. Sink
side). If a failure occurs at the transmission end (i.e. Source side), an automatic switch will be
initiated by the remote(i.e. far end) network element when it detects the failure at its receiving
end. The failures that can be detected at the receiving end are the following:
HBER is generated by the RSPI functional block

LBER (or EWH): generated by the RSPI functional block
EW (or EWL): Early Warning generated by the RSPI functional block
Signal Fail: generated from RSPIlossOfSignal and fails (RxLos, RxFail, DemLos,
DemFail, LOF and RCIM of the RFCOH block and Equipment Defect for the functional
block RSPI and RFCOH (TBC).
Wait to restore
In the revertive mode, a working channel will be switched back to its working section when the
working section has recovered from its failure. In order to prevent several protection switches
due to an intermittent failure, a failed section must be faultfree during a fixed period of time
called waittorestore(WTR) period before it can be used again by a working channel. An Auto
Switch condition will override the WTR period.
The WRT period is not configurable by the management system.
In the nonrevertive mode, when the working section has recovered from its failure it will go
directly to the Do Not Revert state.
5.2.1.5.2 Equipment Protection (EPS)

Equipment protection is provided on:
RRA unit when the user interface is protected

Transceiver unit (Tx only) and RRA unit (RFCOH block only) in HST configurations
Protection architecture is 1+1 only.

No EPS is provided on tributary and aggregate (WADM/WLT subrack) units. As consequence the clock
reference unit function (on board the aggregate unit) is not protected.
No protection of the units composing the control subsystem (i.e. System Controller and Service units)
is envisaged (the payload traffic is not affected by their loss, because configuration data are present also,
and thus survive, on the peripheral units). Equipment configuration data, as a whole, are contained in a
nonvolatile memory in the System Controller unit. Such data can be backupped and restored to/from
the Equipment Craft Terminal/OS in order to limit the eventual reconfiguration of the NE to the delta
between the back up configuration and the state before the crash is occurred.
5.2.1.5.3 Network Protections
WADM/WLT provides the following network protections:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
MSP on STM1 ports

SNCP on all the virtual container
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
236 / 514


5.2.2 Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture

This paragraph describes the control subsystem hardware architecture, defines the control elements, the
function partitioning among them and the external and internal interfaces managed by this subsystem.
5.2.2.1 LHR control subsystem architecture
5.2.2.1.1 Function partitioning
The control subsystem provides the resources to support the communication interfaces and the
processing functions required by the TMN.
As described in the previous para.5.2.1 on page 217 (Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture), the
functionalities performed by the control subsystem can be summarized as follows:
Message Communication Function (MCF)
Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF)
Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF)
Physical Machine Management Function on whole equipment basis (PMMF/E)
Physical Machine Management Function on unit basis (PMMF/U)
Basic Functions (BF)

Each of these functionality groups includes functions with similar characteristics in terms of scope of
operation and performance requirements. In fact:
MCF have to support a high routing throughput and dont require a high availability
Management functions dont require a strict real time processing and a high availability
BF require a strict real time processing and high availability

5.2.2.1.2 Control elements
The control elements supporting the functionalities described above are:
Equipment controller (EC)
Radio Controller (RC)
Supervisory Units (SU)

The control elements logical hierarchy is depicted in Fig. 125. on page 238.
The functionalities are splitted on the control elements composing the control subsystem architecture.
Equipment Controller
One EC has in charge the MCF and VMMF: it provides resources (physical interfaces and protocol
stack) required for the communication between NE and the management systems (OS and ECT),
it performs all the control and management functions of the virtual machine (info model).
No protection of this control element is performed. The EC is physically located aboard the System
Controller board.
Radio Controller
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
One RC has in charge the PMMF/E: it provides the resources to support the control and management
functions related to the real physical machine.
No protection of this control element is performed. The RC is physically located aboard the System
Controller board.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
237 / 514
The SUs have in charge the PMMF/U and the AF. This function requires a real time processing of
the data coming from the ASICs. The SU on board of each unit has the aim to provide an uniform
interface towards the RC avoiding a RC dependency from the HW where the SUs are
accommodated. One SU is accommodated in each unit.
OS
QB3
ECT
F
EC
ISSB
RC
System Controller
CAN
Rem
Inv
Local
uP
SU
Rem
Inv
Local
uP
SU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 125. LHR control subsystem architecture
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
238 / 514

Supervisory Units

5.2.2.1.3 Communication interfaces

A set of (serial and parallel) interfaces are defined as part of the control subsystem to support the
communication task.
They can be classified as system internal or external interfaces.
All the communication links used by the different processing functions (RC and EC) to exchange data each
other or to read/write data from/to the controlled objects (ASICs or other devices on board the different
cards in the equipment) are defined as internal interfaces.
External interfaces are defined as the communication links provided by the control subsystem towards
external devices used for Operation and Maintenance functions or system debug activities.
All the interfaces are reported in Fig. 126. with the association of the units supporting these interfaces.
EC
ISSB
RC
SC
CAN
Inv.
Mem.
Inv.
Mem.
RRA
uP
SW
uP
Inv.
Mem.
SPI
SERV
Inv.
Mem.
uP
MOD
uP
SPI
SPI
SW
ASIC
ASIC
RRAn
SERV
RT
uP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ASIC
MODn
Inv.
Mem.
RTn
Fig. 126. LHR communication interfaces
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
239 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
External Interfaces
The control subsystem provides the following external communication interfaces:
QB3 interface
F interface
Qecc interface
DBG interface
HK/RA interface
QAUX interface
All the above interfaces are supported, at the NE level, by the EC processor, as part of its MCF and
VMMF.
The QB, F, Qecc, Qaux interfaces are available as communication links between the NE
and external control equipments, as required by the TMN environment.
The QB3 protocol stack requires a 10BASE2 (or 10BASET) physical layer and IEEE 802.2 / 802.3
for the data link layer. Through this interface the NE is connected to a LAN for message exchange
with the OS station.
The F interface is a local communication port provided to connect the NE to a local Craft Terminal
station (PC or WS); this interface is implemented as a low speed RS232 port (bit rate is 38,4 Kbit/s
max). Remote CT functionality is performed by routing CT messages to DCCs and viceversa.
The Qecc interface is defined as a TMN related communication interface based on the use of the
Embedded Communication Channels, available in the SOH portion of the SDH frame, as physical
layer. Through the Qecc interface the NE can exchange management messages with a remote OS
(or Craft Terminal) station.
Qecc interface is implemented as a TDM serial link between the EC function and the ASICs on board
of port units. The TDM channel is terminated by the MHDLC, providing for the selection of the
channels to terminate and performing the standard HDLC functions. This interface uses the LAPD
(ITUT Q.921) as data link layer protocol, this protocol is performed by the MCF inside the EC
function.
The Qaux interface is provided as an additional TMN communication interface for message
exchange between the NE and a remote OS station, based on the use of a 2 Mbit/s proprietary
channel.
The DBG interface is a proprietary interface available for software debug activities. A local
communication port for debug is required for each processor (EC and RC) on board the System
Controller. The local debug ports are a low speed RS232 UART based interface, available for VT100
or equivalent debug console.
An equipment network interface for debug activities should be provided as well, implemented as a
10BASE2 Ethernet channel. The EC function should provide a router function between this port and
the internal ISSB bus to allow the use of this port for debugging of RC processor too.
A set of traditional parallel I/O interfaces for local signaling of alarm presence, such as rack lamps,
front panel LEDs and so on are provided by the EC processor.
Internal Interfaces
The control subsystem provides the following internal communication interfaces:
ISSB (Intra Shelf Serial Bus) interface
CAN interface
SPI interface
The ISSB (Intra Shelf Serial Bus) interface is basically an equipmentinternal Local Area Network
for communications among the different microprocessors in the same shelf: the EC processor and
the RC processor and other possible processors. It is a multimaster HDLCbased backplane serial
bus.
The CAN interface allows to connect the RC processor to the microprocessor on board the units.
It is a serial broadcast bus, each node connected to the bus receives all the messages sent by the
other ones. A local filtering mechanism on each node permit to manage only the messages related
to the node. The maximum speed is 1 Mbit/s up to 40 meters length.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
240 / 514


5.2.2.2 WMSN control subsystem architecture

The main characteristics of the WMSN control subsystem architecture are the following (see
Fig. 127. herebelow):
LHR and ADM equipments (1650SMC) control architecture reuse

This means that from the management system point of view this equipment is seen as two different
network elements (both of them with an own address). In this way the LHR and ADM hardware control
architecture are reused without any modification, allowing to preserve the independence of the
software developments of the ADM and radio parts.
Only one F and QB3 interface

The F and QB3 interfaces are present on the ADM part. The radio part sees the TMN information
by means of Qecc interfaces. RECT application is used to manage both the ADM part (directly
connected) and the radio part (via Qecc).
RECT
QB3
ISSB
ISSB
QECC
EC
SC
OS
EC
ADM Controller
RC
System Controller (radio)
SPI
ISPB
Rem
Inv
CAN
ASIC
Unit
ADM part
Rem
Inv
Unit
ASIC
Rem
Inv
Local
uP
Unit
Rem
Inv
Local
uP
Unit
RADIO part
Legend :
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
EC : Equipment Controller (MCF, SEMF: Virtual Machine)

RC : Radio Controller (SEMF: Physical Machine)
SC : Shelf Controller (SEMF: Physical Machine)
ISSB : Intra Shelf Serial Bus
SPI : Serial Peripheral & Inventory
CAN : Controller Area Network bus
ISPB : Intra Shelf Parallel Bus
Fig. 127. WMSN control subsystem architecture
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
241 / 514
5.2.3 Control Subsystem Software Architecture
5.2.3.1 LHR control software architecture

5.2.3.1.1 Functional Decomposition
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The software implemented functions can be divided into the following groups:
Message Routing Function (MRF)

It represents all the functions necessary to set up a management network intermediate system
(intermediate system communication function):
QB3 protocol stack (layer 1 thru 3)
Qecc protocol stack (layer 1 thru 3)
F protocol stack (layer 1 thru 7)
Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF)

It represents all the functions necessary to set up a management network end system (end system
communication function) and to control and manage the virtual machine. No strict real time is
required.
QB3 protocol stack (layer 4 thru 7)
Qecc protocol stack (layer 4 thru 7)
NER
MAF
EMF fault management:
enable/disable alarm reporting
alarm severity assignment
EMF performance monitoring
Configuration and provisioning (virtual machine)
Persistent database management
Software download and management
Security
Physical Machine Management Function (PMMF)

It represents all the functions necessary to control and manage the physical machine. No strict real
time is required.
EMF fault management
EMF performance monitoring
Configuration and provisioning (physical machine)
Basic Function (BF)

It represents all the strict real time signal processing functions that can be performed without
accessing the ASICs
card fail alarm generation: this alarm is an OR of different equipment alarm primitives
alarms correlation between equipment and transmission alarms (transmission alarms are
masked by equipment alarms)
standby cards alarms inhibition (transmission alarms of EPS and RPS standby cards)
alarms time stamping, according to the time at which the alarm status change has been read
from ASIC
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
242 / 514

This paragraph describes the software architecture of the equipment control subsystem.

5.2.3.1.2 Module Decomposition

According to the functional decomposition described in the previous para.5.2.3.1.1 on page 242, the
partitioning of the software into the main design entities, the function and the purpose of each of them are
described hereafter.
a)
Virtual Machine Manager

The Virtual Machine Manager is composed of two main parts (see Fig. 128. on page 244):
Common Software (CSW)

CSW provides two different services:
External Communication Service (ECS)

It manages the protocols for the communication with the manager OS and IMCT.
Network Element Function Application (NEFA)

This component provides a representation of the network element by means of an
information model. This information model describes the equipment from the
management point of view as a collection of managed objects, which can be manipulated
by a management system.
NEFA component is composed by a common part (NEFAC) independent from the
physical resources of the network element that represents only the functionalities
performed in terms of functional managed objects, and a specific part (NEFAS)
dependent from the physical resources that implements the equipment managed objects.
Virtual Hardware Machine (VHM)

VHM manages the communication with the RC function both in terms of application data (it
sends to the RC the provisioning data and receives status and alarms) and in terms of
communication driver. The messages exchanged between EC and RC are logical messages
(information model oriented).
This component stores to persistent memory the data configuration coming from the
management systems.
b)
Physical Machine Manager
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Physical Machine Manager provides a proprietary representation of the managed system in terms
of transmission resources and physical resources. It implements the PMM functions and generally
provides the conversion between the data how they are known from the physical machine and the
info model representation based on managed objects.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
243 / 514

External Communication Service

(ECS)
Common
Software
(CSW)
NEFA Common (NEFAC)
NEFA Specific
(NEFAS)
NEFA
dataBase Handler (dBH)

Physical Machine Manager (PMM)
VHM
EC/RC Interface Handler
Fig. 128. VMM module decomposition

5.2.3.2 WMSN control software architecture
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
From the software architecture point of view, this equipment is composed by two completely independent
parts, with different aims:
Radio functionalities management

See the LHR software architecture for the functional and module decomposition description
(para.5.2.3.1 on page 242).
ADM functionalities management

The functional and module decomposition of this part is inherited by the related ADM product (please
refer to 1650SMC specific documentation).
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
244 / 514
5.2.4 Signal Management

This paragraph describes the signal management performed by 9600LSY equipment.

5.2.4.1 STM1 frame structure and WST mapping
Two types of frame can be envisaged depending on frequency channeling applications:
STM1 + 2xWST (8 columns) + RFCOH (2 columns)
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
J0
NU
NU
B1
MD
MD
E1
MD
A2
F1
NU
NU
D1
MD
MD
D2
MD
D3
B2
B2
ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT OVERHEAD

B2
D4
K1
K2
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
S1
M1
E2
NU
NU
2xWST channels
(8 columns)
RFCOH channels
(2 columns)
MD: Media dependent bytes
NU: Bytes reserved for national use
MSOH bytes are in bypass condition
STM1 + RFCOH (2 columns)
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
J0
NU
NU
B1
MD
MD
E1
MD
A2
F1
NU
NU
D1
MD
MD
D2
MD
D3
B2
B2
ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT OVERHEAD

B2
K1
K2
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
S1
M1
E2
NU
NU
RFCOH channels
(2 columns)
MD: Media dependent bytes
NU: Bytes reserved for national use
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MSOH bytes are in bypass condition
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
245 / 514
5.2.4.2 STM0 frame structure
A1
B1
A2
E1
J0
F1
D1
D2
D3
H1
H2
H3
B2
K1
K2
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
S1
M1
E2
1xWST channel
(4 columns)

STM0 + RFCOH (2 columns)
RFCOH channels
(2 columns)
The Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication (MSREI) M1 is rerouted inside the STM0 frame
from byte #(9,6) of STM1 frame.
MSOH bytes are in bypass condition.
A single WST channel (2.048 Kbit/s) is composed by 36 bytes as described in the following:
Information (1 byte)
1st byte
WST_POH (1 byte)
Information (8 bytes)
P_WST
Sg_stn
Sg_stp
P_WST
Sg_stn
Sg_stp
stn
stp
Sg_stn
Sg_stp
Information (7 bits)
36th byte
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
WST (2.048 Kbit/s)

WST_POH:
P_WST:
Sg_stn:
Sg_stp:
Information:
ED
global SDH plus WST parity (BIP8 operation)

dedicated WST parity (BIP2 operation)
negative stuffing opportunity
positive stuffing opportunity
32 bytes
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
246 / 514

The characteristics of the frame are resumed in the following table:
Signal
WST
n.
columns
Code
redundancy
Symbol
rate
[Mbit/s]
Channel
spacing
[MHz]
f/Sr
Reuse
operation
1.612
1.209
1.195
1.168
1.128
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
STM1
280
7.69%
24.812
40
30.0
29.65
29.0
28.0
STM1
272
7.69%
24.103
28.0
1.161
Yes
STM0
96
7.69%
8.507
14
1.645
The STM1 signal with 0 WST channel is used only for special application (frequency reuse operation
in 28 channel spacing).
The STM0 signal with 1_WST is derived directly from the STM1 frame with 2_WST channels dividing
by three.
RFCOH SERVICES STRUCTURE
The structure of SERVICE CHANNELS inside the RFCOH area is the following:
RFCOH
column xx
column yy
DSI
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
ATPC
1.9
1.10
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
D1
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
D2
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
4.1
4.2
D3
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
E1
5.1
5.2
K0
F1
reserved for service channel
Monitoring channel management:

1.X EWL alarm
2.X EWH alarm
3.X HBER alarm
4.X ATL alarm
[X=1 to 10number of channel]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
5.1 FAIL service 0 (ATL_rfcoh1)

5.2 FAIL service 1 (ATL_rfcoh2)
The decision to select the MC signal coming from ch_ 0 or ch_1 is implemented according to the local DEM
alarms (and BIP4 parity code).
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
247 / 514
SOH MANAGEMENT
the SOH_BUS (5.1 Mb/s) thats used to transport the RSOH bytes information from all the lineside
channels (0,1,2, , N) towards AUX board.
the RFCOH_BUS (1.152 Mb/s) towards channel_0 and channel_1 (radioside)
Available bytes with standard interface (NxG.703) and with RS385 interface (NxV11).
CH_0
CH_1
Crossconnection matrix
RFCOH
CH_0
CH_2
CH_1
BYPASS FUNCTION
CH N
SOH BUS
E1
F1
1.8
1.9
2.2
2.3
2.5
2.6
2.8
2.9
3.2
3.3
3.5
3.6
3.8
3.9
ATPC
DSI
MC
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3
CH1 (#)
CH2 (#)
CH3 (#)
CH4 (#)
CH5 (#)
EXTERNAL INTERFACES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 129. SOH management
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
248 / 514

This block diagram of Fig. 129. herebelow shows some connection for SOH bytes management:

In case of RRA application, the access to SOH bytes is provided by RRA itself; in case of WADM and WLT
application, the access to SOH bytes is concentrated in the baseband part implementing WADM/WLT
functionality.
Each RSOH_byte, if terminated, must be terminated and accessible both at radioside and lineside. The
managed bytes (lineside) are the following:
E1
F1
#1.8, #1.9,
#2.2, #2.3, #2.5, #2.6, #2.8, #2.9,
#3.2. #3.3, #3.5, #3.6, #3.8, #3.9
E1 and F1 are always connected (radioside) to specific RFCOH channels.
The other ones can be connected (radioside) to 5 available interfaces.
In terminaltoterminal application the passthrough mode for each RSOH_byte is provided.
In WADM/WLT terminal application with radio repeater, when a specific service channel must be dropped
in the regenerator, the interested RSOH byte is rerouted in the RFCOH area according with the service
channel columns format (1152 Kbit/s stream):
Column 2
Column 1
DSI
MC
ATPC
MC
D1
MC
D2
MC
D3
MC
E1
FAIL serv + K0
F1
Channel #3
Channel #1
Channel #4
Channel #2
Channel #5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The selection of byte rerouting is performed by ECT/OS.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
249 / 514
RST

RSOH standard_bytes
passthrough function
RFCOH
RSOH termination
E1
USER INTERFACES
F1
D1, D2, D3
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CROSS CONNECTION
MATRIX FOR
SERVICE CHANNELS
ATPC
DSI
MC
RSOH termination
RST
RFCOH
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RSOH standard_bytes
passthrough function
Fig. 130. Service channels functional block diagram
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
250 / 514

The line side SOH bytes can be managed on the ten RST sections available in the maximum system
configuration ( 8+0 or 7+1 ).
SOH bytes handling:
Byte
Handling type
Access type
User interface
E1
terminated
Voice channel DTMF or 64 Kbit/s
G.703 or V.11
F1
terminated
64 Kbit/s
G.703 or V.11
MSU_RSOH
terminated
64 Kbit/s
G.703 or V.11
N.U._RSOH
terminated
64 Kbit/s
G.703 or V.11
D1:D3
terminated
192 Kbit/s
Internal towards SC
J0
terminated
64 Kbit/s
Internal towards SC
MSOH
bypassed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Inside the RRA unit the passthrough function of RSOH bytes is provided, in order to transmit
channels coming from ADM line equipment in transparent mode through the radio system.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
251 / 514
The DCCR are managed by EC both in lineside and radioside.

The DCCR towards lineside are provided by the connection for all the channelunits, but are managed
by EC only the streams towards CH_0 and CH_1 on radioside, where they are inserted inside the RFCOH
bytes.
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
CH_0
Radioside
Lineside
CK+SYNC REF
EPLD
CK+SYNC
DCCR extraction
lineside
& mapping in
6.48 Mb BUS
DCCR
extraction
RSOH
insertion
LOGIC
CK+SYNC
from RFCOH
radioside
CK+SYNC
EPLD
RST SECTION
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
RFCOH SECTION
CH_1
CH_9
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 131. DCCR management (ADM towards RADIO)
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
252 / 514

DCCR Management

CK+SYNC
RST SECTION
RFCOH SECTION
CH_0
Lineside
Radioside
EPLD
DCCR extraction
DCCR
mapping
CK+SYNC REF
DCCR demapping
from 6.48 Mb BUS
& insertion line side
EPLD
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
CH_1
CK+SYNC
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
CH_9
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 132. DCCR management (RADIO towards ADM)
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
253 / 514
On RST section the DCCR are inserted/extracted by dedicated pins (192 Kbit/s) on
contradirectional interface.
The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 0, 1, 2 and the DCCR radioside are mapped inside
the first 6.48 Mbit/s DCC frame (link 1).
The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 3, 4, 5, 6 are mapped inside the the second 6.48 Mbit/s
DCC frame (link 2).
The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 7, 8, 9 are mapped inside the the third 6.48 Mbit/s DCC
frame (link 3).
RST section
(channels 0)
6.48 Mb/s [link 1]
RST section
(channels 1)
6.48 Mb/s [link 2]
MUX/DEMUX
SC
6.48 Mb/s [link 3]
RST section
(channels 9)
RFCOH section
(channel 0)
SWITCH
RFCOH section
(channel 1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 133. DCCR management
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
254 / 514

Notes (see figure below):

Tab. 56. DCC Mapping & Interleaving

The DCC frame is composed by 101.25 bytes (6.48 Mbit/s), and takes into account the
information from/to four STM1 channels:
CR
D1(#1)
D3(#1)
DM
D5
D7
D9
D11
CF2
F2
DF3
x
CR
D1(#2)
D3(#2)
DM
D5
D7
D9
D11
CF2
F2
DF3
xx
CR
D1(#3)
D3(#3)
DM
D5
D7
D9
D11
CF2
F2
DF3
x
DR, DM, DF2, DF3:

D1, D4, F2, F3:
CR, CM, CF2, CF3:
X:
CR
D1(#4)
D3(#4)
DM
D5
D7
D9
D11
CF2
F2
DF3
DR
D2(#1)
CM
D4
D6
D8
D10
D12
DF2
CF3
F3
DR
D2(#2)
CM
D4
D6
D8
D10
D12
DF2
CF3
F3
DR
D2(#3)
CM
D4
D6
D8
D10
D12
DF2
CF3
F3
DR
D2(#4)
CM
D4
D6
D8
D10
D12
DF2
CF3
F3
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
positive stuffing opportunity bytes

negative stuffing opportunity bytes
colored stuffing bytes
empty bytes
5.2.4.3 ATPC Management

The information regarding the ATPC functionality can be resumed in the following (for each channel):
received power (absolute digital value to transmit towards the remote station in order to move the
Tx output power)
Rx failure (for remote Tx inhibition with reused system configuration)
ID_channel + ID_direction (for identification of ATPC channel in order to avoid the repeater bypass
of information and the exactly indication of transmission direction in case of 2+0 (N+0) eastwest
configuration)
They can be organized in registers of the CAN_BUS where the PRx and ID_ch information are transmitted
with higher priority than Rx fail.
They can be sent to the remote station by means 64Kb/s channel 1+1 protected. The information for each
channel received in remote station is sent to the relevant transmitter where the PRx information received
is compared to the thresholds set and it is decided to send up or down or hold commands to the RF
transmitter.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Rx failure received in the Tx remote station is used to switch off the relevant modulator. It will be
switched on after Rx failure removal. Of course the Rx failure alarm is not comprehensive of propagation
alarms.
The ATPC management is performed between two RFCOH sections. That means that in a repeater is
present an ATPC management EAST side and an ATPC management WEST side that work independent
way. The block diagram represented in the following is valid for terminal configuration but can be
considered valid also for repeater configuration EAST (or WEST) side if RRA unit indication is substituted
with DROP_INSERT unit indication.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
255 / 514
RX0 unit

RRA1 unit
RX1 unit
RRA0 unit
Rx failure
PRX DETECTION
From AGC VOLTAGE
RFCOH EXTRACTION
MICROPROCESSOR
CAN_BUS
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
SERVICE
UNIT/ATPC
64 Kb/s
TX1 unit
RFCOH INSERTION
TX0 unit
MOD
On/off
MICROPROCESSOR
Rx failure
CAN BUS
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
SERVICE
UNIT/ATPC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 134. ATPC management
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
256 / 514
5.2.4.4 MC management on RX terminal

RRA 1
RRA 0
RFCOH
DEMUX 0
HITLESS SW
DEMUX 1
SWITCH
ATL_RFCOH1 ATL_RFCOH0
DEM 0
OR local + remote
DEM 1
OR local + remote
DEM 2
OR local + remote
DEM 9
LOGIC
OR local + remote
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 135. MC management on RX terminal
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
257 / 514
In case of multiplexing of an AU4 via AUG, the position and the justification of AU4 structure is managed
by octets H1H2H3 type:
H2
H1
NDF
H3
POINTER
Negative justification
because the other part of the AUOH area:

H1
H2
H3
H3
H3
is filled with octets:

Y = 1001nn11 (where n is a nonspecified value)
U = 11111111
In this sense, we can assume that the only managed transport situation is for an AU4 structure inside
an STM1 signal, and the STM0 design is mapped with 3xVC3 structures (partially filled with the first
container only) into an AU4 unit (European standard).
The demultiplexing operation from an STM1 signal to an STM0 signal can be provided taking one
column for each three columns group, considering that only the first VC3 inside the AU4 structure of
STM1 frame contains the significant payload.
The VC4 POH is maintained in STM0 frame.
The fixed stuffing columns (11, 12) of STM1 frame are removed in STM0 frame.
When the STM1 standard interface is formed by an STM0 signal, the AUOH row is mapped according
to the previous description (H1, H2 and H3 are extracted from the STM0 format), and B2 parity
calculation has to be recomputed with the following criteria:
B2(#1) = B2 coming from STM0 frame
B2(#2) = Y U H3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
B2(#3) = Y U H3
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
258 / 514

5.2.4.5 Sub STM1 framing processing
Starting from three TUG3 units, it is possible to generate the VC4 structure with the mapping of
3xTUG3, 18 bytes of fixed justification and the VC4 POH as described below:
86 bytes
TUG3
86 bytes
86 bytes
TUG3
TUG3
VC4
261 bytes
VC4 POH
FILLED BYTES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 136. VC4 generation from 3 TUG3
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
259 / 514
STM1
AUG
AU4
VC4
3rd TUG3
3rd TU3: unequipped
2nd TUG3
2nd TU3: unequipped
TUG3
TU3
VC3
C3 = 34.368 Kbit/s
TU12
VC12
C12 = 2.048 Kbit/s
X7
TUG2
So, when we speak of STM0 signal transmission we intend a nonstandard interface, based on a single
TUG3 container (the first) coming from the mapping of an AU4 partially equipped.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The 2nd and 3rd TUG3 are always considered as filled with TU3s unequipped container.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
260 / 514

During the multiplexing/demultiplexing of the STM0 signal for the transmission in the radio section of the
first TUG3 tributary, it is necessary to consider the following multiplexing structure, provided in SDH
European hierarchy:
STM1 multiplexing structure with 3xTUG3 carrying VC3 container inside an AU4 unit
1st TU3 pointer

VC4 POH
H1
H2
H3
H3
1st VC3 POH
H1
H1
H1
H2
H2
H2
H3
H3
H3
H3
3xVC3 (interleaved)
H1
H2
H3
H1
H2
H3
1st VC3
Where:
Y=10010011
U=11111111
Fixed stuffing bytes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTE:
In case of AU4 pointer = 0 (NDF=0110 and SS_bits=10) the default value for AUOH row is:
AUOH = H1 Y Y H2 U U H3 H3 H3 = 68 93 93 00 FF FF 00 00 00
In case of 3xVC3 mapping structure, the TU3 pointers for the unequipped containers are fixed to:
H1 H2 H3 = 68 00 00 (NDF=0110, SS_bits=10, pointer=0, pointer offset=0)
The STM0 frame is defined as that frame obtained from the STM1 one, by reducing its capacity to one
third of it.
The SOH bytes are divided into triplets, and the first byte is taken while the other two discarded.
The Higher Order container is a VC4/3, carried in an AU4/3.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
261 / 514
The most important advantage of this solution is the possibility to transmit only the significant part of an
STM1 signal sub equipped on a radio equipment, without any multiplexing/demultiplexing operation or
pointer processing; using the radio network element as a pure regenerator NE.
RST
RREI
NNI:
RST:
RREI:
RPI:
RPI
RF
branching
RF
branching
RPI
RREI
RST
network node interface

regenerator section termination
radiorelay equipment interface
radio physical interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 137. Sub STM1 terminal functional block diagram
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
262 / 514

For hardware convenience it is defined a new entity: AU4/3 carrying a VC4/3, being them structured as
an one third of an AU4.
The AU4/3 mapping carries VC3, VC2, VC12 by two pointer levels (AU_level and TU_level, cascaded);
moreover, fixed stuff columns in their mapping into AU4/3 are in fixed position with respect to the VC4/3
carrier.
STM1 / STM0 frame processing algorithm:

RPS
RSOH
termination
MUX
B1
calculation:
WST & services

Insertion on
STM1 frame
the calculation is
made over all bytes of
the
frame
after
scrambling and the
result is inserted in
the next frame before
scrambling.
Filling all 0 bytes for

columns Nx2 & Nx3
(except A1, A2 and
AUOH row)
M1 change position
B2(#5.1) compensation
B2 compensation
B3 compensation
Div by 3
RPS
Services insertion
on STM0 frame
RST section
RFCOH section
STM0 / STM1 frame processing algorithm:
RPS
WST & services
extraction on
STM1 frame
Services
extraction on
STM0 frame
MUX
Interleaving of all 0
bytes for columns
Nx2 & Nx3
Rewriting A1, A2
Rewriting AUOH
B1 handling:
the byte is recovered from
the SDH frame after
and is
descrambling
compared
with
the
the
calculation over
previous elapsed frame
RSOH
insertion
and B1
calculation
RPS
M1 change position.
(M1 is moved in the original position
[#9.6] and 00 configuration is inserted
in [#9.4] byte)
B2 compensation
B3 compensation
B2 (#1, #3) compensation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RFCOH section
ED
RST section
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
263 / 514
5.2.4.6 SOH handling in normal operation condition
SOH BYTES
TX SIDE
RX SIDE
A1 A2
Refresh
Refresh
B1
Refresh
Refresh
E1
insert
insert
F1
insert
insert
D1 D2 D3
insert
insert
J0
insert
character or
multiframe
insert
character or
multiframe
M.S.U.
insert
insert
NU_RSOH
insert
insert
MSOH
Bypass
Bypass
NOTE
All the RSOH bytes are managed one by one
All the MSOH bytes are in a fixed bypass

condition without any possibility to be
managed.
This operation is involved in Radio Section Termination area (RST) as in the following block diagram:
TX_SIDE SIGNAL FLOW
Line side
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RSPI
RRA
Radio side
RADIO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RX_SIDE SIGNAL FLOW
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
264 / 514

SOH handling in normal operation condition according to the default hardware configuration:
5.2.4.7 Alarms detected in RST section

Alarm
Consequent action
LOS (loss of signal)
MSAIS
LOF (loss of frame)
MSAIS
TIM (trace identifier mismatch)
MSAIS
OOF (out of frame)
OFS count
MSAIS (multiplex section AIS)

MSRDI (multiplex section remote defect indication)
TIM:
when J0 byte, extracted from SDH stream received, is different from the data written in
J0_register by microprocessor interface (according to the regenerator section trace
algorithm), Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) alarm is detected and the AIS condition is
activated.
MSRDI:
the Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication is used to return an indication to the
transmit end that the received end has detected an incoming section defect or is receiving
MSAIS.
MSRDI is generated by inserting a 110 code in positions 6, 7 and 8 of the K2 byte before
scrambling.
MSAIS:
the Multiplex Section AIS indication detect an incoming AIS signal.

MSAIS is generated by inserting a 111 code in positions 6, 7 and 8 of the K2 byte before
scrambling.
N.B.
the Out of Frame Second (OFS) is declared when the STM1 frame alignment process is in the
OOF state.
This parameter is used as additional performance parameter.
The proprietary management of K0 channel (Radio Channel Identification) inside the RFCOH section is
the same of J0 in RST section. The detected alarm is the following:
Alarm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RCIM (Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch)
ED
Consequent action
MSAIS
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
265 / 514
LOS
LOF
SPI
TX_LOS
TX_FAIL
MOD_LOS
MOD_FAIL
TIM (JO)
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RSPI
MOD + TX
RRA channel
RADIOSIDE
LINESIDE
TX FAIL (#)
LOS
LOF
RCIM (K0)
TX DEGRADED (#)
TIM (JO)
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RX_LOS
RX_FAIL
DEM_LOS
DEM_FAIL
RSPI
RX + DEM
RRA channel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(#) referred to optical interface.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
266 / 514

In the following diagram is indicated the functional representation of the system with the alarms indication
as reported to ECT/OS:

In the following diagram is indicated the functional representation of the system with the primitives for the
performance monitoring as reported to ECT/OS.
OOF
TL
EB (B1)
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RSPI
RRA channel
MOD + TX
RADIOSIDE
LINESIDE
EB (B1)
SPI
RST
RST
RL
PSA
PSR
RPS
OOF
FEC
RFCOH
RSPI
RRA channel
RX + DEM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Legend:
EB:
Errored Block
OOF:
Out of Frame
TL:
Transmitted level, is the level of the estimated transmitter power at the transmitter output.
The parameter is represented by two values:
an integer fixed value expressed in [dBm] defining the transmitted power value;
an integer offset value expressed in [dB] representing the variation with respect to the
nominal value.
RL:
Received level, is the level of the estimated received power at the input of the receiver. In 2
release both value will be reported. The parameter unit shall be expressed in [dBm] and
represented by the rounded nearest integer.
PSA:
Protection Switch Actual, represents any actual switch from a protected (working) channel to
a protecting (standby) channel
PSR:
Protection Switch Request, represents any activation of a switch initiation criteria which may
lead to automatic switches from a working channel to a standby channel and viceversa.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
267 / 514
K0 expected
(radio side)
J0 expected
(line side)
J0 transmitted
(line side)
K0 transmitted
(radio side)
J0 transmitted
(radio side)
RST
sink
RST
source
RPS
J0 expected
(radio side)
RFCOH
source
RFCOH
source
RRA channel (TX side)
Action to P:
J0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame)
J0 received value
RPS
RST
sink
RST
source
RRA channel (RX side)
Action to P:
K0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame)
K0 received value
J0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame)
J0 received value
NOTES:
J0 is represented by an integer of 15 digits (multiframe mode9 or one byte (insert character mode).
The default value for J0 is 0000 0001 (unspecified Regenerator Section Trace).
The methodology of J0 management is described in the following para.5.2.4.8.1 on page 269.
K0 is represented by 6 bits (inside a RFCOH byte).
K0_mismatch alarm is detected after 3 consecutive frame of erroneous K0 received, and it is used as
channel switching criteria.
In the system without protection, J0 only is managed.
K0 transmitted and K0 expected are fixed to the default value (K0 = 000000).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In a repeater configuration only K0 management is performed.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
268 / 514

5.2.4.8 Regenerator Section trace management

5.2.4.8.1 J0 management
The J0 byte located at # (1, 7) byte in an STM1 is allocated to a Regenerator Section Trace. This byte
is used to transmit repetitively a Section Access Point Identifier so that a section receiver can verify its
continued connection to the intended transmitter. Within a national network, or within the domain of a
single operator, this Section Access Point Identifier may use either a single byte (containing the code
0255) or the Access Point Identifier format as defined in clause 3/G.831. At international boundaries, or
at the boundaries between the networks of different operators, the format defined in clause 3/G.831 shall
be used unless otherwise mutually agreed by the operators providing the transport.
A 16byte frame is defined for the transmission of Section Access Point Identifiers where these conform
to the definition contained in clause 3/G.831. The first byte of the string is a frame start marker and includes
the result of a CRC7 calculation over the previous frame. The following 15 bytes are used for the transport
of 15 T.50 characters (international Reference Version) required for the Section Access Point Identifier.
The 16byte frame description is given in Table 4/G.707 reported herebelow:
TABLE 4/G.707
16byte frame for Trail APId
Value (bit 1, 2, ,8)
Byte #
1
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
16
:
X
NOTES
1
C1C2C3C4C5C6C7 is the result of the CRC7 calculation over the
previous frame. C1is the MSB.
2
0XXXXXXX represents a T.50 character.
In the case of interworking of equipment implementing the STM identifier functionality (see N.B.) and
equipment employing the Regenerator Section Trace function, the latter shall interpret the pattern
0000001 in J0 as Regenerator Section Trace unspecified. This unspecified Regenerator Section
Trace can also be used if no use of the Regenerator Section Trace is made.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
STM identifier: C1
In earlier versions of the Recommendation, the content of bytes located at S (1, 7, 1) or [1,
6N+1] to S (1, 7, N) or [1, 7N] was defined as a unique identifier indicating the binary value of
the multicolumn, interleave depth coordinate, c. It may have been used to assist in frame
alignment.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
269 / 514
The Trail Trace Identifier is a 16_BYTE or 1_BYTE string used in SDH to detect misconnections inside
a communication network. A receiver has to validate the received string, in order to be sure that it has not
been corrupted by line errors, and compare it with an expected value, in order to verify that it is connected
with the right transmitter. If this is not the case, the receiver has to declare a TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)
alarm.
The 1_BYTE string is made by a single byte (containing the code 0255), while the 16_BYTE frame is
structured as previously described.
In the following, the algorithm to detect the TIM condition is described: this algorithm is applied at all SDH
layers in which Trail Trace Identifier feature is defined, so it is suitable for processing byte J0 (section trace)
and bytes J1, J2 (VCi path trace).
The algorithm behavior is shown in the following Fig. 138. :
DATA
16_BYTE
t, f, d
COMB
t, f, d
TIM1/16 machine
TIM 1/16
alarm
t, f, d
1_BYTE
1/16
t = true
f = false
d = dontcare
TIM
valid CRC7
TIMX machine
TIMX
alarm
valid CONST
Fig. 138. TIM algorithm

Incoming data are at the same time checked in order to find the standard 16_BYTE string with multiframe
alignment word and CRC7, or a fixed 16 times repeating 1_BYTE string. The preset 16/1 is needed to
tell the system if a 16_BYTE or a 1_BYTE string is expected. After validation process (correct CRC7 and
multiframe for the 16_BYTE string, same value 16 times for the 1_BYTE string), the received string is
compared with the expected one. If the preset 16/1 is set to 16, the comparison with 1 is always false;
if the preset 16/1 is set to 1, the comparison with 16 is always false.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Each output (that can assume three possible values: false, true, dontcare if the received string has
not been validated) of the two comparisons is sent, through a COMB function, to a state machine (the
TIM1/16 machine) with four states: alarm, not alarm, and two intermediate states. False causes the state
machine moving towards the alarm state, true causes the state machine moving towards the not alarm
state, dontcare leaves the machine in the state it is.
In parallel, further control is performed by the TIMX machine, in such a way that if for 8x16 times neither
a fixed string nor a correct multiframe alignment word plus CRC7 can be found, the TIM alarm is anyway
declared (this feature is not required by standards at now).
The TIM algorithm described is fully compliant with the standard promptness requests about maximum
detection time and is able to detect all possible crossmisconnections:
expected 1_BYTE string, with a different 1_BYTE or a 16_BYTE string received;
expected 16_BYTE string, with a different 16_BYTE or a 1_BYTE string received;
expected 1_BYTE or 16_BYTE string, with a random string received.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
270 / 514

5.2.4.8.2 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) detector
Here below, TIM algorithm is described in more details:

a)
16_BYTE DETECTOR
As it can be seen in the following Fig. 139. , the 16_BYTE detector internally consists of four
functions:
a multiframe aligner in order to synchronize the machine itself to the 16_BYTE frame;
a CRC7 extractor, in order to calculate the CRC7 from the received frame;
a mismatch detector, in order to determine whether a received 16_BYTE frame is different from
the expected string;
a command generator, which drives the TIM1/16 machine, depending on the outputs of the
preceding two functions.
valid CRC7
CRC7 detector
8
DATA
sync
Multiframe Aligner
Command Generator
t, f, d
match
Mismatch detector
8
1/16
DATA EXP
Fig. 139. The 16_BYTE machine

b)
1_BYTE DETECTOR
The 1_BYTE detector internally consists of four functions:
a mod 16 counter, in order to generate an independent sync;
a 16 byte integrator, which detects whether the received bytes are of the 1_BYTE type;
a mismatch detector, in order to determine whether a received 1_BYTE is different from the
expected one;
a command generator, which drives the TIM1/16 machine, depending on the outputs of the
preceding two functions.
8
valid const
16 byte integrator
DATA
sync
MOD 16 counter
Command Generator
Mismatch detector
t, f, d
match
8
DATA EXP
1/16
Fig. 140. The 1_BYTE machine
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
5.2.4.8.3 K0 management
The K0 bits were defined in RFCOH section to perform a proprietary regenerator section trace internally
to the switching section.
K0 is represented by 6 bits (inside a RFCOH byte).
K0_mismatch alarm is detected after 3 consecutive frame of erroneous K0 received, and it is used as
channel switching criteria.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
271 / 514
5.2.4.9 N+1 Repeater configuration
DEMODULATOR
ALIGNER
DROP / INSERT

0, 1 channels
MODULATOR
RFCOH management:
E1, F1, K0, DCCR, ATPC, DSI, MC,
CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5
NxWST management
2, 3, 4, .... channels
DEMODULATOR
ALIGNER
DROP / INSERT
MODULATOR
RFCOH management:
E1, F1, K0, DCCR, ATPC, DSI, MC,
CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5
NxWST management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Optional: necessary in case of

WST dropinsert only, or in case
of K0 application requirement
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
272 / 514
5.2.4.10 MC management on Repeater configuration

DROP 1 WE
DROP 0 WE
OR operation on local
EWL and EWH alarms
DEMUX 0
DEMUX 1
SWITCH
MUX 0
MUX 1
SPLIT
DEM 0
DEM 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DEM 9
ED
Remote modem
alarms
Local modem alarms
ATL_rem RFCOH 0
ATL_rem RFCOH 1
ATL_loc RFCOH 0
ATL_loc RFCOH 1
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
273 / 514
5.2.5 Remote Inventory subsystem
The Remote Inventory function permits the operator to retrieve information about any card or module
present on the equipment.
The available information, written in a 64x16 bit EEPROM on board (RI device), is: construction date, code
number, maker name, Cardtype, etc. (see details in the Operator Handbook).
The Remote Inventory function is present in all the cards.
The RI can be also present on some submodules assembled on the board (such as optical modules,
microcontrollers and so on).
The relevant data are transported by the CAN bus and are managed by the System Controller unit, which,
besides the information retrieved from the units RI device, add the slot identifier (ID) information.
The System Controller unit can also manage the visual indications of the board (LEDs) and some I/O
parallel commands/contacts/alarms that can eventually be transferred by means of the CAN bus.
The agent microcontroller on each unit manages the Remote Inventory, with the exception of Power
Supply Units (PSU) and Battery Filter units (PSF), that are supported by ESC Agent.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Remote Inventory of units submodules (CANCCOMB modules, Additional TPHDEV and Optical
interface) are supported by the respective Agent Unit.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
274 / 514


CAN 0 BB
SERVICE
WEST
SERVICE
Add.
Add.
IfTPH
unit
MD0
Extension
HK
additional
TPHDEV
IfTPH
unit
MD1
HST
DRIVER
MD2
MD3
MD4
MD5
MD6
MD7
MD8
MD9
CANCCOMB
MODULES
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit
If
CH0
Optical
If unit
interface
CH1
Optical
If unit
interface
CH2
Optical
If unit
interface
CH3
Optical
If unit
interface
CH4
Optical
If unit
interface
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
Optical
If unit
interface
Optical
If unit
interface
Optical
If unit
interface
Optical
If unit
interface
Optical
If unit
interface
OPTICAL
MODULES
HC12
ESC
Agent
N.12 Enable
PSU0
PSU1
PSU2
PSU3
PSU4
PSU5
PSU6
PSU7
PSU8
PSU9
ESC
Unit
Battery filter 1
Battery filter 2
CAN 0 BB
Remoty inventory
Bus
Enable
Clock
Data input
Data output
EEPROM
+3.3V
gnd
Missing
N.B.
SERVICE WEST and HST DRIVER not present in current release
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 141. Remote inventory subsystem architecture
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
275 / 514
5.2.6 System Controller unit description
The Equipment System Controller (ESC) unit is made with two boards: the mother board and the subunit
ESCON.
The block diagram of Fig. 142. is relevant to the whole unit (mother board and the subunit ESCON).
The subunit ESCON performs the main functions:
Equipment controller
Radio controller
DCCR management
Remote Inventory management
Station alarms management
Summarizing alarms management
Housekeeping alarms management
The mother board performs the following main functions:
DCCR Mux /demux

Alarm expansion
I/0 Housekeeping /Station alarms/ Summarizing alarms with relays to Access area subrack
Management of CANBUSes of baseband shelf and RT shelf
Management of parallel missing card alarms
Drivers and connectors for Equipment controller and Radio controller I/O circuits
Management of Power Supply and Battery alarms
ANDOR function
Routering of SPRI register with a dedicate microcontroller.
On the board there is an 8bits microcontroller, to convert the bus SPI of ESCON into CAN 0 BBBUS,
Can 1 BBBus and CanRT bus.
The functions of Equipment Controller and Radio controller are described in para.5.2.2 on page 237.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The functions for the Remote Inventory management are described in para.5.2.5 on page 274.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
276 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
SERVICE WEST and HST DRIVER not present in current release
Fig. 142. System Controller block diagram
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
277 / 514
Resistive
Load
Resistive
Load
CAN0 BB
SERVICE
SERVICE Extension
HST
HKHK
DRIVER
WEST
CAN 1 Download FPGA
CH0CH1 CH1CH2 CH2CH3CH3 CH4CH4 CH5CH5CH6CH6CH7CH7 CH8CH8CH9CH9
Resistive
Load
MD2MD2MD3 MD3
MD4MD4MD5MD5MD6MD6
MD7 MD7MD8MD8MD9MD9
MD0MD1MD1
Resistive
Load
RTX1RTX1
RTX2RTX2
RTX3RTX3
RTX4RTX4
RTX5RTX5
RTX6RTX6
RTX7RTX7
RTX8RTX8
RTX9RTX9
RTX0
Resistive
Load
SPI
CAN0 BB
CAN RT
HC12
Can 0 Can 1
Control. Control.
FPGA
RC
EN
MPC860
EC
EN
HC12
Router
EXP.
ALARM
SPI
Local
bus
FPGA
MPC860
FPGA
SPIL
SPRI
ISS
B
CAN0 BB
Remote
Inventory BB
Power Supply
and
Battery filter
Card Missing
and RT Power
Supply Alarms
UART
P I O/HK
QB3 (10base T
and Debug_N
or EC debug local)
QB3 (10base 2)
CAN 0 BB
and
RC local
debug
ocal

DCCR Management
The System controller manages the DCCR at line side and radio side.
In order to connect DCCR to the Controller, the FPGA inside ESCON board requires a particular
bidirectional link working at 6.48 Mhz.
In order to avoid slips on dropped DCCR byte, due to different frequency between the clock extracted from
STMj (j=0 to 9) and the local timing used to resynchronize the resulting DCCR subframe, a stuffing
mechanism is realized.
The DCC mapping and interleaving is described in Tab. 56. on page 255.
An EPLD performs three bidirectional links in order to insert/extract the DCCR line side of the all RRA
units, and DCCR radio side from/to Service unit:
On the first link 6.48.48 Mbit/s are mapped :
DCCR 192Kbit from/to Service units
DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRASTB0
DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 1
On the second link 6.48 Mbit/s are mapped:
On the third link 6.48 Mbit/s are mapped:
Summarizing/Housekeeping Alarms
The ESCON subunit manages 9 Input and 14 Output signal alarms. By means of the alarms expansion
circuit located on ESC mother board, there are 22 Input and 56 Output signals available.
In 9600LSY application the following number of alarms are managed:
22 HK input
10 HK output
46 output alarms
In order to reduce the power consumption, all relays are switched off in normal conditions; the presence
of active alarms corresponds always to closed contact with a common wire available to the Customer.
The electrical characteristics of relays are: (V is voltage between the warm wire and the common one).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
open contact 72 v V v 2V
closed contact 2 v V v 0V
I v 0.2mA
I v 50mA
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
278 / 514

3DB 02839 AA AA
514
RRA 0,1,2,8,9
Ck + SY from
4
4
4
4
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRASTBY0 )
IN 912
IN 68
IN 14
ESCONX
LogicLogic
Dip Switch
Ck + SY from
Sby channel
Ck + Sy
from
MUXMUX
main channel
Ck + SY from
main
channel
Sy
from
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA 7)
EPLD
Daina
EPLD
6.48
Mbit
OUT 2
OUT 1
OUT 14
CK 38.88 + SY
Stuffing
Stuffing
el.store
el.store
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA8 )
DCCR mappingDCCR mapping
DCCR extractingDCCR extracting
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA9)
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA6
Stuffing
Stuffing
el.store
el.store
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA4 )
DCCR mappingDCCR mapping
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA5)
DCCR extractingDCCR extracting
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA 3)
DCCR TO/FROM
DCCR TO/FROM
Lamp OUT 11
alarms OUT 12
OUT 13
Stuffing
el.store
RST (RRA1)
DCCR mapping
DCCR extracting
DCCR extracting
RST (RRA2
SEL
158
SEL
158
SEL
158
DCCR TO/FROM RFCOH ( Service)
PWANDOR
GA 912
GA 21,22
ORALIM
HK 58
HK 1720
HK 1316
HK 14
Link 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Link 2
955.203.292 Q
Link 1
Link 3
ED
Link 2
Link 3
Fig. 143. DCCR and summarizing/housekeeping alarms management block diagram
03
279 / 514
E
N
SPI
Can 0
Can 1
Can 0
Can 1
Control. Control.
FPGA
GA1 FREE
GA2 TUP
Vcc
0
1SEL
2
138
OE
G
CK
374
OE
F
CK
374
OE
E
CK
374
OE
D
CK
374
OE
C
CK
374
OE
B
CK
374
OE
A
CK
374
GA41
GA42
GA43
GA44
GA45
GA46
GA47
GA48
GA33
GA34
GA35
GA36
GA37
GA38
GA39
GA40
HK5
HK6
HK7
HK8
HK9
HK10
GA31
GA32
GA23
GA24
GA25
GA26
GA27
GA28
GA29
GA30
GA15
GA16
GA17
GA18
GA19
GA20
GA21
GA22
GA7
GA8
GA9
GA10
GA11
GA12
GA13
GA14
HK1
HK2
HK3
HK4
GA3
GA4
GA5
GA6
TUP
INT
Service Battery
From Battery
Filter 1 and 2
Alarms battery
Rack lamps
to M184
connector of
M184
toarea
Access
(BB shelf)
ANDOR

5.2.7 Flash Card description
The FLASH CARD contains, after the system SW loading and system configuration carried out
through the Craft Terminal:
1)
the whole Equipment software programs (susceptible to be downloaded toward the Supervisory
Units);
2)
the system configuration data. This configuration data set is named MIB and can be saved as
a file in the Craft Terminal (or OS) environment, as well as can be restored in the Flash Card
retrieving this file from the Craft Terminal (or OS);
3)
the routing configuration data (N.B.):
Local Configuration
OS Configuration
NTP Server Configuration
LAPD Configuration
Ethernet Configuration
RAP Configuration
MESA Configuration.
This configuration data set cannot be saved together with MIB data.
The presence of the FLASH CARD as individual part simplifies the maintenance procedure in case
of failure of the System Controller, as explained in para.7.7.4.4 on page 384 and para.7.7.4.5 on page
384.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
This list is merely for general information only. Refer to the C.T. Operators Handbook for a more
precise list.
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
280 / 514

5.2.8 Additional Housekeeping unit description

The Additional Housekeeping (HKDEV) is an optional unit.
By its use, other 18 HK Inputs become available, besides those already available with the System
Controller unit.
Fig. 144. herebelow shows the unit block diagram.
(M1) is the connector for getting the 18 HK Inputs (for pinout see point a ) on page 154).
The connector (M2) is connected by cable to connector (M179) of Baseband shelf (see Fig. 95. on page
178). By this cable the unit:
receives power supply

is connected to the System Controller unit by CAN 0 BB bus
sends the Card Fail and Card Missing signals to the System Controller
A red led on the front indicates the failure of Additional Housekeeping unit
18 Housekeeping
Inputs
M1
CEPT
INTERFACE
SUBD 25 pins
female
3.45 V
5.3 V
M2
Remote
Inventory
HC12
mP
HKDEV Card Fail

led
SUBD 9 pins
male
HKDEV Card Missing

Can 0 BB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 144. Additional Housekeeping block diagram
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
281 / 514
The Power Supply subsystem distributes both batteries BATT.A and BATT.B voltages to each user circuit
in the following way:
a)
Primary voltage distribution (see Fig. 145. herebelow for block diagram, and Fig. 94. on page 176
for physical implementation).
Primary sources BATT.A and BATT.B are connected to TRU distribution frame.
From TRU box, BATT.A and BATT.B are distributed by individual cables, each one protected by circuit
breakers, to the subracks (Tab. 15. on page 128 indicates the TRU breaker utilization).
b)
Power Supply distribution in the Transceiver shelf (see Fig. 145. herebelow and Fig. 97. on
page 181).
Power supply cables from TRU are connected to following connectors:
(M2) for BATT.A and (M3) for BATT.B, by means of which transceivers TR0 to TR4 receive
power through the shelf backpanel
(M5) for BATT.A and (M6) for BATT.B, by means of which transceivers TR5 to TR9 receive
power through the shelf backpanel
BATT. A
BATT. B
TR0
TR9
TOP RACK UNIT
...
TRX BACK PANEL
B.B. BACK PANNEL
FAN SUBRACKS
ADM BACK PANEL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 145. Power Supply distribution from Top Rack Unit and Transceiver shelf Power Supply
distribution
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
282 / 514

5.3 Power supply subsystem
c)
Power Supply distribution in the Baseband shelf

Power supply cables from TRU (see Fig. 145. on page 282) are connected to following connectors:
BATT.A cable connected to Power Supply Input connector of PSF1 unit equipped in slot 25 (i.e.
on the left) of Baseband shelf
BATT.B cable connected to Power Supply Input connector of PSF2 unit equipped in slot 36 (i.e.
on the right) of Baseband shelf
N.B.
PSF unit front view is depicted in Fig. 76. on page 153
PSF1 and PSF2 position in the shelf is shown in Fig. 64. on page 135
The distribution of Power supply from PSF units to the subrack is depicted in Fig. 146. herebelow:
each PSF unit receives also the power supply voltage from the other PSF; after filtering:
BATT.A and BATT.B primary voltages are distributed through the backpanel toward the Power
Supply units PSU0 .... PSU9 (slots (E) in Fig. 64. on page 135)
converted voltages are distributed through the backpanel to units SERVICE and SYSTEM
CONTROLLER in the shelf (respectively in slot (A) and (B) in Fig. 64. on page 135), and,
through its cable, to ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING unit (see para.3.6.8 on page 154)
The distribution of Power supply from PSU units to the units MODEM and RRA/RRAS is depicted
in Fig. 146. herebelow:
PSU units are grouped in 2units groups (i.e. PSU0+PSU1 , PSU2+PSU3 , ..). Each PSU pair
converts and then distributes, through the backpanel, power supply to the correspondent pair of RRA
and MODEM.
AL0
+5,3V
Power
Supply 0 +3,45V +5,3Vp
MODEM 0
+3,45Vp
RRA 0 or
RRASTBY
AL1
+5,3V
Power +3,45V
Supply 1
Battery 2
Battery 1
RRA1
+5,3Vp
+3,45Vp
MODEM 1
AL8
+5,3V
MODEM 8
Power
Supply 8 +3,45V +5,3Vp
Filter1
+3,45Vp
RRA 8
DC/DC
BATT. 1
Bat 1
AL9
+5,3V
ALf1
RRA9
Power +3,45V +5,3Vp

Supply 9
+3,45Vp
MODEM 9
Bat 2
ALf2
+3,45Vp
DC/DC
BATT. 2
+5,3Vp
Filter2
SERVICE
Additional
Housekeeping
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SERVICE BATTERY
SYSTEM
CONTROLLER
Fig. 146. Power Supply distribution in Baseband shelf
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
283 / 514
Service Battery to System Controller unit

In addition to the voltage distributed by PSF1 and PSF2 units, the System Controller unit receives
also the battery voltage by means of the cable used for Station Alarms management (see Tab. 37. on
page 191). This allows the System Controller unit to manage the TRU lamps also in case of power
supply missing from both PSF1 and PSF2 units.
e)
Power Supply distribution to Additional Housekeeping unit

The Additional Housekeeping unit is powered as the System Controller unit (of which it must be
considered an extension), as depicted in Fig. 146. on page 283. From the physical point of view,
power supply is lead on the cable connecting the Additional Housekeeping unit to the BB shelf (see
f)
Power Supply distribution in the Fans shelves

Power supply cables from TRU (see Fig. 145. on page 282) are connected to following connectors
of Fans shelf (see Fig. 93. on page 172):
(M1) for BATT.A
(M4) for BATT.B

As depicted in Fig. 163. on page 312, both BATT.A and BATT.B voltages are distributed to both FANS
ASSEMBLED units.
Inside each FANS ASSEMBLED unit, as depicted in Fig. 164. on page 313, there are two power
supply units (one receiving BATT.A power supply voltage, the other receiving BATT.B power supply
voltage) from which, diodedecoupled, power supply is distributed to the four fans of the assembly.
g)
Power Supply distribution in the 1650SMC (ADM) shelf
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Please make reference to 1650SMC specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.2 on page 471).
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
284 / 514

d)
ED
955.203.292 Q
STM1
F
QB3
PIO
STM1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
O/E
DCCR
RRA
RST
SRS
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
Ktx
FPGA
IF to TR
SERVICE
MOD
IF 0 to TR0
DSI,MC,ATPC
Protected second WST

use
with Modem/ RRA
Protected
1x2Mb/s
in future release
EOW
64 Kb
HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/s from Access Area

NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s from Service
RRA Stby
MOD
The RFCOH and one WST can be protected

only two channels
HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/s from Access Area

NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s from Service
9
Switch logic
N+1
RFCOH
5.1 Mb
5.1 Mb
From RRA 2/8/9
5.1 Mb
RFCOH
Select by ECT
MUX
5.1 Mb
DCCR
RST
SC
DCCR
O/E
FPGA
Select by ECT

5.4 Baseband subsystem
5.4.1 Interconnection general block diagrams
The following Fig. 147. and Fig. 148. show the unit interconnection block diagram respectively for Tx
side and Rx side configurations, with regard to the transmitted/received signals and the internal signal
and message exchange.
Fig. 147. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Tx side
03
285 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 148. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Rx side
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
286 / 514
DEM
Protected
1x2Mb/s
IF from TR
DSI,MC,ATPC
64 Kb
EOW
Protected second WST

Modem/ RRA
in future release
DEM
SERVICE
The RFCOH and one WST can be protected

only two channels
IF from TR
Select by
ECT
Select by
ECT
FPGA
RFCOH
5.1 Mb
Switch logic
N+1
5.1 Mb
RFCOH
FPGA
RST
RST
DCCR
O/E
DCCR
SC
O/E
PIO
QB3
STM1
STM1

NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s to Service
HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/sto Access Area
RRA Stby
MATRIX
5.1 Mb
DCCR
5.1 Mb
RRA 2/8/9
APSE
RRA
HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/sto Access Area

NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s to Service
5.4.2 RRACHANNEL STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description

RRACHANNEL performs the following main functions:
Electrical CMI NRZ and NRZCMI conversion
RSOH line side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit
DCCR line side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit
RFCOH radio side Extraction/insertion from/to Service Unit
DCCR radio side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit
Unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction
Hitless Switch
Serial BUS (Insertion on parallel wires of Modem/ RRA alarms)

On the front of the board the following interfaces are available:
the STM1 electrical interface (it is fixed on the board and cannot be extracted)
one red led to indicate the card failure

On the RRACHANNEL unit it is possible to insert the optical interface module (refer to para.5.4.4 on page
292 for its description).
RRACHANNEL description
An electrical CMI /NRZ conversion is performed with LOS input alarm generation in Tx section. In the
receive section the complementary operations are performed.
The RRA uses two ASICs:
one implementing:
the Input/Output RRA Section (Regeneration Termination Adaptation according to G783)
and the Hitless switch, performing the RPS (Radio Protection Switching) function
the other, implementing:
the RFCOH Insertion/Extraction function
and the unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction function.

All these functions are bidirectional.
Delay cells, placed in TX sides, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two
signals.
The delay can be set with one bit step in the range 0 to 256 bits.
Delay cells, placed in RX side, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two
signals. The static delay equalization is obtained by means an automatic procedure to facilitate the
approach during field installation.
At RX side, whenever both paths are aligned, the phase comparator generates an OK command,
indicating that a switching operation can be performed.
The Switch command comes from the logic switch placed on the service board.
Inside the ASIC, the loopback connections are present, as described in the Equipment Control Subsystem
description (see para.5.2.1.2.2 on page 226).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is managed by the ASIC.

The alarms, commands, and every other information regarding the communication with System controller
are organized in the registers of SPI and converted by Microcontroller in Can 0 BBBus.
The FPGA download uses Can 1 BB bus.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
287 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
955.203.292 Q
LOS
input
Equalizer
CMI/NRZ
SEL
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
Can 1BB
can
TX
TX
TCXO
RX
RX
DCCR
KRn
ASIC
Pat
Ok
KAIS
12
NRZ/HDB3
From
RRASTBY
Parallel wire alarms
WST1 LOS
RRA MISSING
NRZ
To modem
RRA ALARMS
Red led
NRZ 2Mbit WST

protected.
From/to Service
From Modem
NRZ
CK
Loopback
only local
LOS_ R
RFCOH
vcxo
38.88 Mhz
38.88
Mhz
WST1 FAIL
CK
NRZ
only local
Loopback
RX
From Modem
RFCOH RFCOH
TX

Parallel alarms from Modem
TX
RFCOH
2 * 2Mbit WST
HDB3 1 * 2Mbit WST

unprotected.
RRA ALARMS
Kofin
38.88 Mhz
vcxo
PhasePhase
comparcompar
vcxo
To modem
RFCOH
Vcxo A
RFCOH
2 * 2Mbit WST
Switch
Delay
256 bits
0256
ElasticElastic
memmem
. Delay
Delay
32bit 32bit 256
00256
Elastic Elastic
mem mem
.
32bit 32bit
Ok Bit
To
RRASTBY
Parallel
Serial Fast alarms
155.520
Mhz
TX
RST
RST
Serial Bus To Service
Can 0BB
RSOH
SEL
TX
DEMUX
.
DEMUX
A.L.S
68HC012
SPI
RXRX
RSTRST
TCXO
38.800
Mhz
loopback
loopback
G.A CERBERO
NRZ+CK
MUXMUX
NRZ+CK
TX fail /degrade
(only optical)version
Optical
Interface
Signal input
Switch Optical
Missing
Optical
STM1
Electrical
STM1
DCCR RSOH
delay
ED
delay
Fig. 149. RRACHANNEL block diagram
03
288 / 514
5.4.3 RRASTANDBY STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description

The RRASTBY unit performs the following main functions:
Electrical CMI NRZ and NRZCMI conversion

RSOH and DCCR line side Extraction /Insertion to/ from Service Board
RFCOH radio side Insertion/Extraction to/from Service Board
TX/RX distributor
Switch of the reference signal
Unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction
In N+0 configuration there are two possibilities:

1)
2)
RRASTBY unit forced to be used as RRA unit

Use RRA unit instead of RRASTBY
the STM1 electrical interface (it is fixed on the board and cannot be extracted)
a onedigit display to indicate the number of the channel protected (1... 9)
one red led to indicate the card failure

On the RRACHANNEL unit it is possible to insert the optical interface module (refer to para.5.4.4 on page
292 for its description).
RRASTBY description
An electrical CMI /NRZ conversion is performed with LOS input alarm generation. In the receive section
the complementary operations are performed.
The RRASTBY uses an ASIC and a FPGA:
one implementing:
the Input/Output RRA Section (Regeneration Termination Adaptation according to G783)
and the Hitless switch, performing the RPS (Radio Protection Switching) function
the other, implementing:
the RFCOH Insertion/Extraction function
and the unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction function.

All these functions are bidirectional.
Delay cells, placed in TX sides, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two
signals.
The delay can be set with one bit step in the range 0 to 256 bits.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Delay cells, placed in RX side, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two
signals. The static delay equalization is obtained by means an automatic procedure to facilitate the
approach during field installation.
The Mux insert one of nine streams (38.88Mbit/s) from RRA 1 to RA 9.
From Switch Logic the unit receives the Keta command that selects, by MUX, the transmit channel to
be paralleled toward the standby path.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
289 / 514
Inside the RRASTBY there are the loopback connections, as described in the Equipment controller sub
system chapter.
The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is managed by the ASIC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The FPGA download uses Can 1 BB bus.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
290 / 514

At RX side the unit receives a 155 Mbit stream from RFCOH section (this signal comes from standby
demodulator) and sends it by splitter to the respective RRA1/RRA9 unit.
ED
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
can
Can 0 BB
68HC012
Can 1BB
Interface
Optical
TX fail/degrade
(only optical version)
Missing
Equalizer
CMI/NRZ
Switch
Optical
Signal I/O
SPI to ASIC & FPGA
Optical
STM1
LOS
input
Electrical
STM1
ASIC
TCXO
RX
RST
TX
Serial Fast alarmsSerial
Phase
compar
delay
Elasticmem Delay
0256
32bit
Elasticmem.
32bit
RRASTBY
ALARMS
Vcxo
A
KAIS
12
Switch
RFCOH
LOS_ R
1 * 2Mbit WST
unprotected.
RRA
MISSING
RRASTBY
ALARMS
Red led
RRA CARD fail
NRZ
CK
From modem
Loopback
only local
To modem
NRZ
FPGA
LOS_RIFn
NRZ 2Mbit WST

protected.
From/to Service
38.88
Mhz
vcxo
RX
RFCOH
1 * 2Mbit WST
TX
RFCOH
NRZ/HDB3
Delay
0256
Delay
256
0
38.88 vcxo
Mhz
SeeTable
RRASTBY
DATA ALARMS
Fast alarms
KOP
FPGA
FPGASCIARON
155.520
Mhz
TX
loopback
RX
RST
TCXO
38.800
Mhz
RSOH
RSOH
SEL
DEMUX
MUX
SPLITTER
A.L.S
NRZ+CK
NRZ+CK
SEL
DCCR
From RRA1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9

Serial BusTo Service FPGA Parallel alarms from Modem HDB3 1 * 2Mbit WST
unprotected.
To RRA1..RRA9
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 150. RRA STANDBY block diagram
03
291 / 514
5.4.4 STM1 optical module description
The STM1 optical module is the optical physical interface for the STM1 cards. Different types are
available according to the connector type, fibre and optical power range.
Each module contains two optical components (Tx and Rx), two level adapters, the remote inventory and
the ALSrestart pushbutton.
The RX optical component converts the 155.52 Mb/s STM1 optical signal into electrical, recoveries the
clock, detects the LOS alarm.
The TX optical component converts the electrical signal (data & clock) into optical, detects the
Laserfailure and Laserdegrade alarms. Receives the Lasershutdown command from the controller
and the ALSrestart command from a front pushbutton.
OPTICAL
INPUT
EDR
DATA RX
Level
Rx Opt. Module
ECKR
Adapter
CLOCK RX
LOS
EDT
ECT
DATA TX
Level
CLOCK TX
Adapter
OPTICAL
Tx Opt. Module
OUTPUT
Laser Fail
Laser deg.
Laser
Shutdown
ALSRestart
o
o
Remote
GND
Rinv
Inventory
TO CAN BUS
OPTICAL MODULE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 151. STM1 optical module block diagram
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
292 / 514

See Fig. 71. on page 148 (physical view) and Fig. 151. on page 292 (block diagram).
5.4.5 128QAM MODEM STM1 1WST and STM0 0WST description

The modem performs the following main functions:
Terminal / repeater Modulator

Terminal / repeater Demodulator
XPIC / Base Band Combiner
Demodulator first IF input

Second IF input XPIC or IF diversity
Third IF input XPIC from cross polar receiver (has to be utilized when reuse and diversity are used
contemporaneously)
IF Modulator Output
The second and third IF input are associated to optional baby boards.
One red led is also present to indicate the MODEM card fail.
Modem description
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In a single ASIC the following parts are implemented: MLC code and decoder, Mapping 128 QAM, Digital
filter, BSE, FSE, XPIC and Base Band combiner.
The main functions are described in the following, according to MODEM block diagram (see Fig. 152. on
page 296):
I/O
The input/output interface, composed by NRZ signal and CK signal, is internal interface. The signals
come from/to RRA unit / RRA STBY or DROP in repeater configuration, no external access is
available.
The input/output signal is converted in four parallel streams; because of different transmission
capacities planned, the streams have, accordingly, different rates.
MLC code error

The MLC 6,5/7 coding scheme employs a set of binary codes of decreasing Hamming distance
combined with nested signal constellations of increasing Euclidean distance. Each code selects one
of the two subsets into which the corresponding constellation level is portioned. In this way a more
efficient use of redundancy is possible, since more powerful codes protect points a low Euclidean
distance, while less powerful codes are used for points at larger Euclidean distance. The coding
scheme uses both convolutional and blocks code.
The convolutional codes are the powerful ones in the scheme, while the block codes is a simple parity
check.
The first level code/decoder convolutional is obtained by Viterbi decoder for the code 2/3
The second level code /decoder convolutional works with an other Viterbi for the code 7/8
The Third level has a Wagner decoder for code 24,23
To reduce the effects of burst errors due to the convolutional code, a suitable interleaving technique
has been implemented. The structure of the interleaving is based on the introduction of distinct delay
chains on the parallel signal stream.
The two signals, the in phase channel and the quadrature channel, after MLC code QAM mapping
they are sent at 1/T frequency to a 36 taps digital shaping filter. The two filtered signals come out from
the ASIC at 2/T frequency.
ASIC output signals are converted into analog signals by two D/A converters (10 bits) and, then, a
Butterworth filter (7 poles) filters them.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
293 / 514
BB/IF Side modulation

Two IF (140 MHz) inquadrature carriers are modulated by the two filtered signals by means of two
balanced mixers. Then, modulated carriers are summed in order to generate a 128 QAM
CROSSmodulated signal.
First IF/BB Side demodulation

First IF (140 MHz) signal (from main Transceiver) is BB converted by means of two mixers that are
controlled by a carrier recovery circuit.
Converted signal is, then, filtered by two Butterworth analog filters that have to guarantee proper NFD
for different modulation formats (poles number =9, cutoff frequency fco=0.55 0.65/T).
Two A/D converters sample filters out coming signals.
Second IF and third IF

A baby board called second IF and third IF carry out the same function of the first IF main.
Second IF is applied from diversity or cross polar signal.
When diversity and copolar are contemporaneously used, a third IF input is connected to
crosspolar main receiver.
Clock recovery
A Gardner synchronizer that controls a VCXO, which provides a sampling signal at 2/T frequency,
performs clock recovery.
Gardner algorithm is implemented in ASIC Modem
Equalizer cable for space diversity system
1IF Maim
Delay 1
The delays
adjustment is
Self acting by
ECT
2IF diversity
Delay 2
3 IF cross Main
0 Delay 3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Every IF can be delayed a maximum 7x Ts/2 at Ts/2 step , compensate the static delays resulting
from the different paths of the two signals diversity.
An automatic procedure by ECT set the difference of the delays respective First and Second IF.
There is not automatic procedure for delay of the third IF.
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
294 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Equalizer (FSE/DFE)
Into ASIC are implemented a synchronous equalizer (BSE Baud Spaced Equalizer), and a
Fractionally Spaced Equalizer (FSE).
FSE consists of a dual structure FIR filter and two mixers. Filtering section is 4D structured, (i.e. it
consists of four 19 taps filters), DFE consist of four 1 tap decision.
XPIC
When the frequency reuse is requested the XPIC cancellers the crosspolar interference.
On each way in dual polarization the IF signal is baseband converted, filtered and sampled by A/D
converters at 2/T frequency. Samples taken at t=KT are distinguished from those taken at
t=(KT+T/2) by XPIC S/P converters by means of 1/T frequency clock signal.
XPIC is adapted by means of error signals coming from equalizer and its central coefficient is left
spare for phase errors recovering.
XPIC output signal is sent to equalizer way adder.
XPIC way ASIC receives algorithm switch control signal and deep fading reset signal from equalizer
way ASIC.
Base band Combiner

Space diversity is based on the simultaneous reception of the transmitted signal at two vertically
separated antennas, its effectiveness depend on the fact that the correlation between the two fields
is low if the antennas are well separated.
The baseband combiner, which operates on the coherently demodulated signals is based on the
minimization if the mean square error at the decision device.
The scheme is the same of XPIC with these difference: the central coefficient is constrained, we have
one Clock recovery by a Gardner synchronizer for each IF signal. An estimation of the power of the
signal at the output of the two FSE is calculated. The clock that has the grater power is selected
Gardner algorithm is implemented in ASIC Modem
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
295 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 152. MODEM block diagram
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
296 / 514
Third IF
Second IF
DEM
loss
90
vco
90 90
2 Squelch
3 Squelch
90 90
Second IF loss
Third IF loss
Card fail,missing
and
Remote Inventory
IF
MAIN
T/2
T/2
T/2
Delay
andand
EQUAL.
DELAY
DELAY
DROPDROP
FIR QFIR Q
FIR I
ASIC
CorrCorr.
90
XO
140Mhz
Baby boards
alarms
can
68HC12
spi
CONTROL
ALARMS, SQUELCH
Agent Modem
Mhz
VCXO C
MODEM CARD
fail
to RRA or RRASTBY
or
DROP
Data/ck
D/A
D/A
Electronic
fuses
Can 0BB
Modem Alarms
Red led
DROP MISSING
Mod
IF out
+5.3
+3.45 v

vcos
TO vcos
TO
carriercarrier
B&W
Decoder
ElasticElastic
P/S
DecisionDecision MLC
memory
SUM
gardner gardner
gardnergardner
Clock
select
T/2
interleaverinterleaver,
Elastic
Rate Rate
encoderMLCencoderMLC,
store
adapter mapper
adapter
mapper
Mir Pseudo Pseudo

random random
S/P S/P
Delay
Delay and
andEqual
Card fail,missing
and
Remote Inventory
A/DA/D
A/DA/D
A/DA/D
A/DA/D
A/D
A/D
Data/ ck
VCXO
B
140Mhz
Squelch Main
From RRA or RRASTBY

or
DROP
Los_M
VCXO A
5.4.6 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit description

The Service Terminal performs the following main functions:
Insertion/Extraction and termination of RSOH bytes

Rerouting of RSOH bytes on RFCOH bytes
Protection and management of RFCOH bytes
System service channels and telephone services management
I/O service channels and telephone services
I/O DSI, ATPC, MC bytes, DCCR
Switch logic N+1, 1+1, 1:1
I/O protected WST channel
Switch and SW logic for WST signals
N.B.
The RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST can be protected only on the two channels selected
by ECT from the couples shown in the following table:
Tab. 57. Channels protectable for RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST
N.B.
N+1 Terminal
2 X (4+1) WEST (N.B.)
2 X (4+1) EAST (N.B.)
0,1
0,1
9,8
0,9
0,4
9,5
1,2
1,2
8,7
8,9
3,4
6.5
1,9
1,4
8,5
Configurations not available in first release
On the front of the board are provided the following connectors and led:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Phone Jack (EOW )

Reset button
One red led that indicates engaged line
One green led that indicates free line
One red led that indicates SERVICE card fail
One display that indicates the protected Rx channel
One yellow led indicating the manual operation of switch logic N+1
Input /output 2 x 2Mbit protected WST
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
297 / 514
5.4.6.1 Service Channels
The service channels (see Fig. 153. on page 299) are managed by a FPGA able to provide on external
interfaces (programmable by ECT) the RSOH bytes from/to line side channel (channel 0 to 9) and also
RFCOH bytes protected in 1+1 from RRA units.
Eight channels are be provided towards Users. In particular:
One (omnibus channels on E1 byte), one telephone jack and three analog party lines
3 x 64 kbit/s V11 or 2 x 64 kbit/s and 1 x128 kbit/s , V11 (Sw configurable for connection to 1 or 2
bytes)
3 x 64 kbit/s G703
1 x 9600 kbit/s V24/V28 Data channel
The service unit manages a TPH byte only to/from the RFCOH byte protected in 1+1 or to/from external
connection.
The desk telephone TPH, by HD selection, can be sent either into RFCOH byte or toward ADM in format
G703 (see block diagram).
E1, F1, D1D3 bytes are always accessible both at radio and line side, while a maximum of 5 bytes line
and radio side may be accessed chosen between the remaining RSOH bytes.
At radio side, the service channels (comprehensive of DCCR, monitoring channels, ATPC, DSI bytes) are
dropped/inserted in 1+1 protected mode (splitted at Tx side and switched at RX side).
The Tx service alarm (ATL RFCOH) is remotized by means of monitoring channel (with 1+1 protection)
to be used with ATL and HBER remote alarms as minor switching criteria, while demodulator alarm and
HBER alarm are considered major switching criteria.
By means of a matrix function it is possible:
to address to service the lineside user interfaces RSOH bytes from different RRA and/or RFCOH
bytes (7 bytes) on RRA used for 1+1 protection;
to reroute RSOH bytes to RFCOH and viceversa.
For the detailed description of RSOH, RFCOH and DCCR management, please make reference to
para.5.2.4 on page 245 (Signal Management).
5.4.6.2 2Mbit Way side traffic
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The FPGA, after HDB3/NRZ conversion, splits the 2Mbit/s asynchronous digital stream.
The two channels (N.B.) are inserted/extracted to/from a selected couple of RRA units among the those
specified in Tab. 57. on page 297. To minimize the errors during the switching operation a make before
break switch is adopted and particular care is taken in switching logic.
N.B.
ED
In first release, only one channel can be used (see Fig. 69. on page 145).
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
298 / 514

The characteristics of service channels are given in para.6.2 on page 316.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 153. SERVICE block diagram
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
299 / 514
To M190
BB Access
Area
Out
Loudspeaker
RFSOHRX/TX
# 59
V28
NRZ
G703
RZ
COMBO
EOW
RJ11
ANA ANA
LOG LOG
I/O TPH
G703
TPHTPH
To ADM
NRZ
DCCR
192kbit
K
RR
K
RR
WST Los 1and 2
2x2 Mb/s
SERVICE
MISSING
CAN 0 BB
ALARMS,
CONTROL
CAN 1 BB
68HC012
SPI service
To /from RRA 0/1/2/8/9

Like RFCOH frame
RFCOHRX/TX # 9
RFCOHRX/TX # 2
RFCOHRX/TX # 8
RFCOHRX/TX # 1
Red led
SERVICE CARD fail

RFCOHRX/TX # 0
AIS I/O
Insertion
DUAL LINE
INTERFACE 1
M
U
X
//
D
E
M
U
X
Dip switch

Additional
DSI,ATPC,MC
MUXMUX
x Party Lines
3 x 64 kb/s 3 x 64 kb/s TPHTPH
Party
3 3xLine
1x 64 Kb/s1x 64 Kb/s
V11
NRZ
Hd
command
I/O Radio
COMBO
E1E1
DCCR
192kbit
DEMUXDEMUX
FPGA
MATRIX
MATRIX
Radio
Radio side
Rerouting
A
Rerouting
A side
FPGA
NTONI
E
MATRIX
MATRIX
NRZ, CK, 64, SYNC
I/O Line
Lineside
side
Line
Open on 1st SERVICE

unit in 4+0/4+1
E/W configuration
1x 9600Kb/s
# 04
In, N+1 configuration, this function performs the hitless switch, by processing the propagation alarms
coming from demodulators. The Tx and Rx functions, respectively in station A and station B of the link,
must be connected by 64 Kb/s (DSI channel) to exchange information for Tx signal parallel before RX
switch. The 64 Kbit signal is processed in Switch logic.
The Switch logic N+1 is carried out inside FPGA and performs the following functions (see
Fig. 154. herebelow and Fig. 155. on page 301):
gets the switching controls from the regular and standby channels
determines the weights of various channels: priorities and simulations
protects and releases the channels in N+1 configuration, using two service units in 4+1 E/W
configurations (this latter function not used in current release)
performs the lookout and incoming inhibit
manages the freezing operations
manages the manual forcing at the receive side.
Modem 1
Parallel alarms
DAT A
T
O
SYNC
MD 1 Missing
CK
RRA 1
RRA 1 Missing
Modem
9
Parallel alarms
MD 9 Missing
DAT A
SYNC
CK
RRA 9
I
T
RRA9 Missing
Modem
0
Parallel alarms
MD 0 Missing
DAT A
SYNCH
CK
RRA
Stby
RRAStby Missing
ENTONI
FPGA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RRA n Missing
SERVICE
Fig. 154. Switch logic N+1
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
300 / 514

5.4.6.3 Switch Logic N+1

LSY - Technical Part1 Ed03 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LSY - Technical Part1 Ed03 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

9600LSY/LHR REL.1.0/2.0 TECHNICAL HDBK

SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

2.3.3 Channel configurations and protection schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

3.6.6 MODEM unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

5.4.4 STM1 optical module description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

7.4.2 Station Alarms (TRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

19 SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

20 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Fig. 48. G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Fig. 98. System cabling: types of used cables (A, B, C, D, E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Fig. 151. STM1 optical module block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Fig. 201. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 6/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Tab. 14. Rack and shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Tab. 63. Relationship between Remote and Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

Chapter 1 Document Guide

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Access to the Equipment

Service Personnel skill

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Tab. 1. Quick guide

read chapter 18 on page 465 of this handbook

have a very short description of the

read para.2.4 on pages 51 thru 62 of this handbook

logically configure a station (or

have details on system cabling

BaseBand and Transceiver shelves as a whole, read

units in BaseBand shelf, read para.3.6.1 on page 135

units in Transceiver shelf, read para.3.7.2 on page 156

units in FANS shelf, read para.3.9.1 & 3.9.2 on page 169

units in OPTINEX rack and ADM shelf, refer to